Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 274

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION


SECTION TM B

TM

E
CONTENTS
6MT: FS6R31A GEAR OIL ......................................................... 17 F
Exploded View .........................................................17
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 Inspection ................................................................17
Draining ...................................................................17 G
M/T SYSTEM ....................................................... 6 Refilling ....................................................................17
System Diagram ........................................................ 6
System Description ................................................... 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 18
H
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .......................... 8 REAR OIL SEAL ............................................... 18
Exploded View .........................................................18
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH .................................. 8 Removal and Installation .........................................18 I
Component Parts Location ........................................ 8 Inspection ................................................................18
Component Inspection .............................................. 8
SHIFT CONTROL .............................................. 19
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ............... 9 Exploded View .........................................................19 J
Component Parts Location ........................................ 9 Removal and Installation .........................................19
Component Inspection .............................................. 9 Inspection ................................................................24
K
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 10 AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 25
Exploded View .........................................................25
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
Removal and Installation .........................................25
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................10 L
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 10 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ................................ 27
Exploded View .........................................................27
PRECAUTION .............................................. 11 Removal and Installation .........................................27 M
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................11 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ............. 30
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................30
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .........................................30 N
SIONER" ................................................................. 11
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 31
tion after Battery Disconnect ................................... 11 O
Precaution for Battery Service ................................ 12 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 31
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Trans- Exploded View .........................................................31
mission .................................................................... 12 Removal and Installation .........................................31
Inspection ................................................................34 P
PREPARATION ........................................... 13
FRONT OIL SEAL ............................................. 35
PREPARATION ..................................................13 Exploded View .........................................................35
Special Service Tools .............................................. 13 Removal and Installation .........................................35
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15 Inspection ................................................................37

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 17 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 38

Revision: 2010 March TM-1 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 38 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL .......................... 103
Exploded View ........................................................ 38 System Diagram ................................................... 103
Disassembly ........................................................... 44 System Description ............................................... 103
Assembly ................................................................ 52 Component Parts Location ................................... 105
Inspection ............................................................... 69 Component Description ........................................ 106

MAIN DRIVE GEAR ........................................... 71 SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL ............................ 107


Exploded View ........................................................ 71 System Diagram ................................................... 107
Disassembly ........................................................... 71 System Description ............................................... 107
Assembly ................................................................ 71 Component Parts Location ................................... 110
Inspection ............................................................... 72 Component Description ........................................ 111

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR .................................. 74 SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL ........................... 112


Exploded View ........................................................ 74
Disassembly ........................................................... 74 ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) ...................... 112
Assembly ................................................................ 75 ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : System Di-
Inspection ............................................................... 81 agram .................................................................... 112
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : System
COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR ........................ 84 Description ............................................................ 112
Exploded View ........................................................ 84 ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : Compo-
Disassembly ........................................................... 84 nent Parts Location ............................................... 114
Assembly ................................................................ 84 ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : Compo-
Inspection ............................................................... 87 nent Description .................................................... 115

REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR ............. 91 MANUAL MODE ...................................................... 115
Exploded View ........................................................ 91 MANUAL MODE : System Diagram ...................... 116
Disassembly ........................................................... 91 MANUAL MODE : System Description ................. 116
Assembly ................................................................ 91 MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location ...... 117
Inspection ............................................................... 91 MANUAL MODE : Component Description ........... 118

SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD ......................... 92 LOCK-UP CONTROL ....................................... 119
Exploded View ........................................................ 92 System Diagram ................................................... 119
Disassembly ........................................................... 92 System Description ............................................... 119
Assembly ................................................................ 92 Component Parts Location ................................... 121
Inspection ............................................................... 93 Component Description ........................................ 122

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SHIFT MECHANISM ......................................... 123


(SDS) ........................................................... 95 Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 123
System Diagram ................................................... 124
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS System Description ............................................... 124
(SDS) .................................................................. 95 Component Parts Location ................................... 147
General Specifications ............................................ 95 Component Description ........................................ 147
End Play ................................................................. 96
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 148
Baulk Ring Clearance ............................................. 96
System Description ............................................... 148
Shift Fork ................................................................ 96
Component Parts Location ................................... 149
7AT: RE7R01A Component Description ........................................ 149
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 97 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 150
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 150
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 97
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 97 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 151
Question sheet ....................................................... 98 CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ........... 151
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 100 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 157
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 100 U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA ........... 157
System Diagram ....................................................100 Description ............................................................ 157
System Description ................................................100 DTC Logic ............................................................. 157
Component Parts Location ....................................101 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157
Component Description .........................................102
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 158

Revision: 2010 March TM-2 2009 G37 Convertible


Description ............................................................ 158 DTC Logic .............................................................. 179
DTC Logic ............................................................. 158 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 158
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 181
P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................ 159 Description ............................................................. 181
Description ............................................................ 159 DTC Logic .............................................................. 181 B
DTC Logic ............................................................. 159 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 182
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 159
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ...................... 183 C
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A .. 161 Description ............................................................. 183
Description ............................................................ 161 DTC Logic .............................................................. 183
DTC Logic ............................................................. 161 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183
TM
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ...................... 185
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- Description ............................................................. 185
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 162 DTC Logic .............................................................. 185 E
Description ............................................................ 162 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185
DTC Logic ............................................................. 162
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 163 P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A. 186
Description ............................................................. 186 F
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 164 DTC Logic .............................................................. 186
Description ............................................................ 164 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186
DTC Logic ............................................................. 164 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 164 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A ............................ 187
Description ............................................................. 187
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 166 DTC Logic .............................................................. 187
H
Description ............................................................ 166 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 187
DTC Logic ............................................................. 166
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 188
Description ............................................................. 188 I
P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................... 168 DTC Logic .............................................................. 188
Description ............................................................ 168 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188
DTC Logic ............................................................. 168 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 P0780 SHIFT ................................................... 189
Description ............................................................. 189
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 170 DTC Logic .............................................................. 189
Description ............................................................ 170 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 189 K
DTC Logic ............................................................. 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171 P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C. 190
Description ............................................................. 190
L
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO .................. 172 DTC Logic .............................................................. 190
Description ............................................................ 172 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190
DTC Logic ............................................................. 172
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172 P1705 TP SENSOR ......................................... 191 M
Description ............................................................. 191
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 173 DTC Logic .............................................................. 191
Description ............................................................ 173 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 191 N
DTC Logic ............................................................. 173
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 174 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL .................. 193
Description ............................................................. 193
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 175 DTC Logic .............................................................. 193 O
Description ............................................................ 175 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 194
DTC Logic ............................................................. 175
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176 P1730 INTERLOCK ........................................ 195
P
Description ............................................................. 195
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 177 DTC Logic .............................................................. 195
Description ............................................................ 177 Judgment of A/T Interlock ...................................... 195
DTC Logic ............................................................. 177 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 196
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 178
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 197
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 179 Description ............................................................. 197
Description ............................................................ 179 DTC Logic .............................................................. 197

Revision: 2010 March TM-3 2009 G37 Convertible


Diagnosis Procedure .............................................198 Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - ........ 233
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 238
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ................................ 199 Protection Control ................................................. 241
Description .............................................................199 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 242
DTC Logic ..............................................................199 DTC Index ............................................................. 242
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................200
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ......203 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 244
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]..203
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift- SYSTEM SYMPTOM ........................................ 244
down)] ....................................................................204 Symptom Table ..................................................... 244

P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D. 205 PRECAUTION ........................................... 249


Description .............................................................205
DTC Logic ..............................................................205 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 249
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................205 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E. 206 SIONER" ............................................................... 249
Description .............................................................206 Precaution for Battery Service .............................. 249
DTC Logic ..............................................................206 General Precautions ............................................. 249
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................206 Service Notice or Precaution ................................ 250

P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F. 207 PREPARATION ......................................... 251


Description .............................................................207
DTC Logic ..............................................................207 PREPARATION ................................................ 251
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................207 Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 251

P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G. 208 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 252


Description .............................................................208
DTC Logic ..............................................................208
A/T FLUID ......................................................... 252
Changing ............................................................... 252
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................208
Adjustment ............................................................ 253
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
A/T FLUID COOLER ........................................ 255
CUIT ................................................................. 209
Cleaning ................................................................ 255
Description .............................................................209
Inspection .............................................................. 257
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................209
STALL TEST .................................................... 258
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 211
Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 258
Description .............................................................211
Component Function Check ..................................211 A/T POSITION .................................................. 259
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................211 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 259
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 212 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 260
Description .............................................................212
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - .....212 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR .................................... 260
Component Function Check ..................................214 Exploded View ...................................................... 260
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................215 Removal and Installation ....................................... 260
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........220 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 261
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) .............221
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ..........221 CONTROL ROD ............................................... 262
Exploded View ...................................................... 262
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR . 222 Removal and Installation ....................................... 262
Description .............................................................222 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 262
Component Function Check ..................................222
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................222 PADDLE SHIFTER ........................................... 263
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Exploded View ...................................................... 263
Indicator) ................................................................224 Removal and Installation ....................................... 263

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 226 OIL PAN ............................................................ 264


Exploded View ...................................................... 264
TCM .................................................................. 226 Removal and Installation ....................................... 264
Reference Value ....................................................226 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 265

Revision: 2010 March TM-4 2009 G37 Convertible


AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 266 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 272
Exploded View ...................................................... 266 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 266 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 273
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ............................... 267
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS B
Exploded View ...................................................... 267
Removal and Installation ....................................... 267 (SDS) ............................................................... 273
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 269 General Specification ............................................ 273
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ...... 273 C
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 270 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
es ........................................................................... 274
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 270 Stall Speed ............................................................ 274 TM
Exploded View ...................................................... 270
Torque Converter .................................................. 274
Removal and Installation ....................................... 270

Revision: 2010 March TM-5 2009 G37 Convertible


M/T SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
M/T SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375512

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

JPDIC0027ZZ

1. Front cover 2. Main drive gear 3. Counter shaft


4. 6th counter gear 5. 2nd counter gear 6. 1st counter gear
7. 3rd counter gear 8. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 9. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
10. 4th counter gear 11. Adapter plate 12. Reverse idler gear
13. Reverse idler shaft 14. Reverse counter gear 15. Mainshaft
16. Rear extension 17. Striking rod 18. Reverse synchronizer hub
19. Reverse coupling sleeve 20. Reverse main gear 21. 4th main gear
22. 3rd main gear 23. 1st main gear 24. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve
25. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 26. 2nd main gear 27. 6th main gear
28. Transmission case 29. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 30. 5th-6th synchronizer hub

System Description INFOID:0000000004375513

DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 4th gear is equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever.
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER

Revision: 2010 March TM-6 2009 G37 Convertible


M/T SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
The 1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears are equipped with a triple-cone synchro-
nizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever. A

PCIB1432E

TM

Revision: 2010 March TM-7 2009 G37 Convertible


BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R31A]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004804468

1 : Back-up lamp switch

JPDIC0588ZZ

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004804469

1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH


1. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector. Refer to TM-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between back-up lamp switch terminals.

Terminal Condition Continuity


Reverse gear position Existed
1 2
Except reverse gear position Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace back-up lamp switch. Refer to TM-27, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2010 March TM-8 2009 G37 Convertible


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R31A]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
A
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004804470

B
1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

TM

JPDIC0589ZZ E
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004804471

1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH F

1. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector. Refer to TM-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals.
G

Terminal Condition Continuity


Neutral position Existed H
1 2
Except neutral position Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to TM-30, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2010 March TM-9 2009 G37 Convertible


NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R31A]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000004375518

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If nec-
essary, repair or replace these parts.

CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)


SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)

SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)


BEARING (Worn or damaged)
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)

INSERT SPRING (Damaged)


GEAR (Worn or damaged)
GASKET (Damaged)
OIL (Oil level is high)

SHIFT FORK (Worn)


OIL (Oil level is low)

OIL (Wrong oil)


TM-17

TM-38

TM-19

TM-38

TM-38
Reference

Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2 2
Jumps out of gear 1 1 2 2

Revision: 2010 March TM-10 2009 G37 Convertible


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005106770

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000005106822 K
NOTE:
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion, then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both
battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. M
If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position. P
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.

Revision: 2010 March TM-11 2009 G37 Convertible


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering
wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000005106823

Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-
ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the
window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic
window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transmission INFOID:0000000004802978

CAUTION:
• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC tube. Because CSC slides back to the
original position every time when removing transmission assembly. At this timing, dust on the slid-
ing parts may damage a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-17, "Removal
and Installation".
• Never reuse drained gear oil.
• Check the oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level ground.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transmission clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are
required, be certain they never interfere with the function of the parts they are applied.
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to out-
side. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
• Never damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
• Never hold control lever housing to prevent the bushing of control lever housing from deformation
when moving transmission assembly.
• Never touch lip of oil seal.

Revision: 2010 March TM-12 2009 G37 Convertible


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004802979
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description C
Tool name
KV381054S0 Removing rear oil seal
(J-34286) TM
Puller

ZZA0601D

ST33400001 Installing rear oil seal F


(J-26082)
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
G
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.

ZZA0814D
H

ST22490000 Holding an adapter plate


(-)
Adapter setting plate I
a: 156 mm (6.14 in)
b: 220 mm (8.66 in)

S-NT407

ST33200000 Installing counter rear bearing


K
(J-26082)
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. L

ZZA1002D
M
KV32103300 Installing reverse synchronizer hub assembly
(J-46529)
Press plate
a: 73 mm (2.87 in) N

O
PCIB0165J

ST01530000 Installing reverse synchronizer hub assembly


(-) P
Drift
a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.

ZZA0534D

Revision: 2010 March TM-13 2009 G37 Convertible


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
ST23860000 Installing reverse counter gear
(-)
Drift
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 33 mm (1.30 in) dia.

ZZA0534D

KV38102100 Installing front oil seal


(J-25803-01)
Drift
a: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
c: 24.5 mm (0.965 in) dia.

ZZA1046D

ST33061000 Installing striking rod oil seal


(J-8107-2)
Drift
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.

ZZA1023D

KV32102700 Installing main drive gear bearing


(-)
Drift
a: 48.6 mm (1.913 in) dia.
b: 41.6 mm (1.638 in) dia.

ZZA0534D

ST30911000 • Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-


(-) bly
Inserter • Installing mainshaft bearing
a: 98 mm (3.86 in) dia. • Installing reverse main gear bushing
b: 40.5 mm (1.594 in) dia. • Installing 3rd gear bushing
• Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assem-
bly
ZZA0920D

ST27861000 • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-


(-) bly
Support ring • Installing 1st gear bushing
a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.

ZZA0832D

ST30022000 • Installing 3rd main gear


(-) • Installing 4th main gear
Inserter
a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.

ZZA0920D

Revision: 2010 March TM-14 2009 G37 Convertible


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description A
Tool name
KV40100630 Installing 4th counter gear thrust washer
(J-26092) B
Inserter
a: 67.5 mm (2.657 in) dia.
b: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia.
C

ZZA0920D

ST30032000 Installing counter rear bearing inner race TM


(J-26010-01)
Inserter
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
E

ZZA0920D F
ST30031000 Measuring wear of inner baulk ring
(J-22912-01)
Puller G

H
ZZA0537D

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000004802980 I

Tool name Description J


Puller • Removing reverse main gear
• Removing reverse synchronizer hub
• Removing reverse counter gear
K

L
NT077

Puller Removing each bearing, gear, and bushing


M

ZZB0823D

Revision: 2010 March TM-15 2009 G37 Convertible


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Tool name Description
Pin punch Removing and installing each retaining pin
a: 6 mm (0.24 in) dia.

NT410

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E

Revision: 2010 March TM-16 2009 G37 Convertible


GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R31A]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
GEAR OIL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375522
B
Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".
Inspection INFOID:0000000004802981 C

OIL LEAKAGE
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transmission or around it. TM
OIL LEVEL
1. Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transmission case.
E
2. Check the oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level. F
3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transmission
case.
CAUTION: G
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-38,
"Exploded View". JPDIC0590ZZ
H
Draining INFOID:0000000004802982

1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up transmission. I


2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove drain plug and gasket from transmission case and then drain gear oil.
J
4. Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
5. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". K

Refilling INFOID:0000000004802983

L
1. Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transmission case.
2. Fill with new gear oil to transmission as shown in the figure.
M
Oil grade and : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubri-
viscosity cants".
Oil capacity : Refer to TM-95, "General Specifica- N
tions".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained gear oil. O
3. After refilling gear oil, check the oil level. Refer to TM-17, JPDIC0590ZZ

"Inspection".
4. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transmission case. P
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
5. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-17 2009 G37 Convertible


REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


REAR OIL SEAL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375526

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004802984

REMOVAL
1. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-7, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension using the puller [SST:
KV381054S0 (J-34286)].
CAUTION:
Never damage rear extension.

PCIB0194E

INSTALLATION
1. Install rear oil seal (1) to rear extension using the drift [SST:
ST33400001 (J-26082)].

Dimension “H” : 1.2 – 2.2 mm (0.047 – 0.087 in)


CAUTION:
Never incline rear oil seal.
2. Install propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-7, "Removal and
Installation".

JPDIC0587ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000004802985

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection".

Revision: 2010 March TM-18 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
SHIFT CONTROL
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375528

TM

L
JPDIC0342GB

1. Shift knob 2. Insulator 3. Seat M


4. Console finisher assembly 5. Felt 6. Hole cover
7. Control lever boot B 8. Hole insulator 9. Control lever boot A
10. Guide plate 11. Control lever 12. Control lever spring N
13. Control lever housing 14. Control rod
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
O
: Apply Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
P
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375529

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift knob with the following procedure.
a. Release metal clips on console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2010 March TM-19 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
b. Lift console finisher assembly and then set a suitable pliers to
control lever ( ).
CAUTION:
Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and control
lever to avoid damaging control lever.

JPDIC0654ZZ

c. Set a suitable pliers to shift knob.


CAUTION:
Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and shift knob
to avoid damaging shift knob.

JPDIC0003ZZ

d. Keeping control lever in place with a suitable pliers, loosen shift


knob with a suitable pliers.
NOTE:
Remove shift knob from control lever keeping a suitable pliers in
place because a certain power to turn shift knob is still neces-
sary even after adhesive is peeled.
e. Remove shift knob from control lever.
f. Remove insulator from shift knob.
2. Remove seat from control lever.
CAUTION:
Never lose seat. JPDIC0004ZZ

3. Remove console finisher assembly.


4. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".

5. Release control rod boot from control lever housing.


6. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and then separate control lever and
control rod.

SCIA2561J

Revision: 2010 March TM-20 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
7. Remove felt.
A

JPDIC0005ZZ

TM
8. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and then remove hole cover.

G
JPDIC0006ZZ

9. Remove control lever boot B, hole insulator, and control lever H


boot A.

JPDIC0007ZZ
K
10. Remove mounting bolts ( ) while holding guide plate.
11. Remove guide plate, control lever, and control lever spring from
L
control lever housing.

N
JPDIC0009ZZ

INSTALLATION O
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to sliding surface of control lever.
2. Install control lever spring, control lever, and guide plate to control lever housing.
3. Temporarily tighten guide plate mounting bolts while holding guide plate. P

Revision: 2010 March TM-21 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
4. Install control lever to control rod and then tighten mounting bolt
( ) to the specified torque.
5. Install control rod boot to control lever housing.
CAUTION:
Fit control rod boot to the groove on control lever housing.

SCIA2561J

6. Install guide plate with the following procedure.


a. Shift the control lever to 6th gear position (A).
b. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it
stops, and keep control lever in this position.
c. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control
lever portion (C).
d. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (D).

JPDIC0625ZZ

e. Shift the control lever to 5th gear position (A).


f. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it
stops, and keep control lever in this position.
g. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control
lever portion (C).
h. Tighten mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque.
i. Tighten mounting bolts (E) and (F) to the specified torque.

JPDIC0626ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-22 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
7. Install control lever boot A (1) to control lever (2).
CAUTION: A
• Check that groove of control lever boot A is engaged to
guide plate (3).
• Be careful that control lever boot A is installed according B
to the specified location ( ).
8. Install hole insulator and control lever boot B.
CAUTION: C
Be careful with the orientation of hole insulator and control
lever boot B.
JPDIC0624ZZ
TM
9. Install hole cover and then tighten mounting bolts ( ) to the
specified torque.
CAUTION: E
Be careful with the orientation of hole cover.

G
JPDIC0006ZZ

10. Install felt. H


11. Install center console assembly. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and
Installation".
12. Install console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and I
Installation".

JPDIC0005ZZ K

13. Install seat (1) and insulator (2) to control lever (3).
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of seat. L
• Never lose seat.
14. Apply thread locking sealant to control lever threads and then
install shift knob to control lever. M
• Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or
an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants". N
CAUTION:
Remove the remaining adhesive on control lever and shift JPDIC0627ZZ
knob threads.
O
15. Set shift knob in the correct position with the following procedure.

Revision: 2010 March TM-23 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
a. When tightening shift knob, if shift knob comes to the proper
position within 1/2 turn from the position at which resistance
begins to be felt, tighten it 1 more turn to set it in the proper posi-
tion.

: Vehicle front
A : Proper position
B : Start position on reaction force
b. If it takes more than 1/2 turn from the position at which resis-
tance begins to be felt, tighten it to set it in the proper position.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust shift knob with loosing.
• After adjusting to the proper position, until 30 minutes
pass, never operate the shift intensely such as screwing
or turning shift knob to opposite direction since a locking
sealant because stiff.

JPDIC0010ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000004802986

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


Control Lever
• When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no interference or boot disengage-
ment.
• When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no binding, noise, or backlash that
disturbs shifting.
• When control lever is shifted to the 5th or 6th gear position by being pressed in the right side direction with-
out being pressed downward, check that there is no binding or poor gear engagement.
• When control lever is shifted to the 1st-2nd side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to
the neutral position.
• When control lever is shifted to the 5th-6th side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to
the neutral position.
• When control lever is in a position other than the reverse gear position, check that control lever can be
pressed downward.
• When control lever is pressed and held downward, check that control lever can be shifted to the reverse
gear position.
• When control lever is shifted from the reverse gear position to the neutral position, check that control lever
returns smoothly to the neutral position with spring power.
• When control lever is not pressed downward, check that control lever cannot be shifted to the reverse gear
position.
Shift Knob
Check that there is no shift knob dislocation.
Boot
Check that there is no damage, twist, or dislocation of boot.

Revision: 2010 March TM-24 2009 G37 Convertible


AIR BREATHER HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375531

TM

G
JPDIC0334ZZ

1. Air breather tube 2. Breather tube 3. Air breather hose


H
: Vehicle front
: Refer to “INSTALLATION” in TM-31, "Removal and Installation" for the tightening torque.
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004802987

REMOVAL
J
Refer to TM-25, "Exploded View" for removal procedure.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and refer to TM-25, "Exploded View" for installation procedure. K
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
winding when installing it.
• Be sure to insert air breather hose into breather tube until L
hose end reaches the tube's base.

SCIA2663J
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-25 2009 G37 Convertible


AIR BREATHER HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Be sure to insert air breather hose into air breather tube until
hose end reaches the radius curve end.

JPDIC0469ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-26 2009 G37 Convertible


BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004802988

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". B


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004802989

REMOVAL C
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove control lever with the following procedure.
TM
a. Release control rod boot from control lever housing.
b. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and then separate control lever from
control rod. E

G
SCIA2561J

c. Remove console finisher assembly as shown in the figure. Refer


to IP-25, "Removal and Installation". H

JPDIC0018ZZ
K
d. Remove felt as shown in the figure.

N
JPDIC0019ZZ

e. Remove center console assembly to remove hole cover as O


shown in the figure. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".

JPDIC0020ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-27 2009 G37 Convertible


BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
f. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and then remove hole cover.
CAUTION:
Never damage center console assembly.
g. Remove control lever boot B, hole insulator, and control lever
boot A.

JPDIC0021ZZ

h. Remove mounting bolts ( ) while holding guide plate.


i. Remove guide plate, control lever, and control lever spring from
control lever housing.
3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-6,
"Removal and Installation".
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-7, "Removal
and Installation".
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug to rear oil seal of transmission assembly
after removing propeller shaft assembly.
JPDIC0022ZZ
5. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness.

6. Remove rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM-68, "Removal and Installation".
7. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the back-up lamp switch connector can be disconnect. Then
disconnect back-up lamp switch connector.
8. Disconnect clip (A) from bracket (1).

: Vehicle front

9. Remove bracket from rear extension.

JPDIC0522ZZ

10. Remove back-up lamp switch from rear extension.

: Vehicle front

JPDIC0523ZZ

INSTALLATION

Revision: 2010 March TM-28 2009 G37 Convertible


BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
1. Temporarily tighten back-up lamp switch onto rear extension by
rotating once or twice. A
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
2. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch B
as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
C

JPDIC0526ZZ

TM
3. Tighten back-up lamp switch to the specified torque.

: Vehicle front E
4. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of
removal.
F

G
JPDIC0523ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-29 2009 G37 Convertible


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004802990

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004802991

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector.
3. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and plunger from
rear extension.

: Vehicle front

JPDIC0524ZZ

INSTALLATION
1. Install plunger to rear extension.
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of plunger.

: Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch side

JPDIC0653ZZ

2. Temporarily tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch onto rear


extension by rotating once or twice.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
3. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position
(PNP) switch as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
4. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch to the specified
torque.
5. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of JPDIC0526ZZ

removal.

Revision: 2010 March TM-30 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375533
B

TM

JPDIC0496ZZ
H
1. Transmission assembly
: Refer to "INSTALLATION" in TM-31, "Removal and Installation" for the locations and tightening torque.
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375534

CAUTION: J
Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC tube. Because CSC slides back to the
original position every time when removing transmission assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding
parts may damage a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and
Installation". K
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. L
2. Remove control lever with the following procedure.
a. Release control rod boot from control lever housing.
b. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and then separate control lever from M
control rod.

SCIA2561J

Revision: 2010 March TM-31 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
c. Remove console finisher assembly as shown in the figure. Refer
to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".

JPDIC0018ZZ

d. Remove felt as shown in the figure.

JPDIC0019ZZ

e. Remove center console assembly to remove hole cover as


shown in the figure. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".

JPDIC0020ZZ

f. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and then remove hole cover.


CAUTION:
Never damage center console assembly.
g. Remove control lever boot B, hole insulator, and control lever
boot A.

JPDIC0021ZZ

h. Remove mounting bolts ( ) while holding guide plate.


i. Remove guide plate, control lever, and control lever spring from
control lever housing.
3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-6,
"Removal and Installation".
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-7, "Removal
and Installation".
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into rear oil seal of transmission assembly
after removing propeller shaft assembly.
JPDIC0022ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-32 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
5. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and Installation". A
7. Remove clutch tube (1), clutch hose (2), and lock plate (3).
Refer to CL-16, "Removal and Installation".
B
: Vehicle front

CAUTION:
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of C
clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
• Never depress clutch pedal during removal procedure. TM
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into clutch hose and CSC tube after JPDIC0026ZZ

removing clutch tube.


E
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor. Refer to EM-68, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-17, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-43, "Removal and Instal- F
lation".
11. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector.
12. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) and heated oxy- G
gen sensor 2 (bank 2) connectors. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and
Installation".
H

JPDIC0024ZZ I
13. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not J
contact with the wire harness.
NOTE:
By placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front sus- K
pension member, the removal of transmission assembly from
engine becomes easier.
14. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) mounting nuts. Refer L
to EM-68, "Removal and Installation".
15. Remove rear engine mounting member. Refer to EM-68, JPDIC0023ZZ

"Removal and Installation".


M
16. Remove engine and transmission mounting bolts using a power tool [Commercial service tool].
17. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the back-up lamp switch connector can be disconnect. Then
disconnect back-up lamp switch connector.
N
18. Remove harness and harness brackets and then temporarily secure it to a position where it will not inhibit
work.
19. Remove transmission assembly from the engine.
O
CAUTION:
• Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while removing it.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the three way catalyst (right bank) and three
way catalyst (left bank). P
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch hose.
• The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover.
• Never hold control lever housing to prevent the bushing of control lever housing from deforma-
tion when moving transmission assembly.
20. Remove CSC body and CSC tube. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
21. Remove dynamic dampers. Refer to EM-68, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2010 March TM-33 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while installing it.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the three way catalyst (right bank) and three way
catalyst (left bank).
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch hose.
• The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover.
• Never hold control lever housing to prevent the bushing of control lever housing from deformation
when moving transmission assembly.
• Tighten transmission assembly mounting bolts to the specified
torque. The figure is the view from the vehicle forward.

Bolt symbol A B
Insertion direction Transmission to engine Engine to transmission
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
“ ” mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34) JPDIC0650ZZ
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
*: Tightening the bolt with air breather tube.
• If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to EM-112, "Disassembly and
Assembly".
Inspection INFOID:0000000004804355

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


• Check the shift control. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection".
• Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection".

Revision: 2010 March TM-34 2009 G37 Convertible


FRONT OIL SEAL
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
FRONT OIL SEAL
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004802992

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". B


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004802993

REMOVAL C
1. Drain gear oil. Refer to TM-17, "Draining".
2. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation".
TM
3. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1).
4. Remove front cover and front cover gasket from transmission
case. E

G
JPDIC0343ZZ

5. Remove front oil seal from front cover using a flat-bladed screw-
driver. H
CAUTION:
Never damage front cover.
I

SCIA1399E
K
INSTALLATION
L

Revision: 2010 March TM-35 2009 G37 Convertible


FRONT OIL SEAL
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
1. Install front oil seal (1) to front cover using the drift (A) [SST:
KV38102100 (J-25803-01)].

Dimension “H” : 8.55 – 9.55 mm (0.3366 – 0.3760 in)


CAUTION:
Never incline front oil seal.
2. Install front cover gasket and front cover to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse front cover gasket.
• Never damage front oil seal.
• Remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
both mating surfaces.

JPDIC0586ZZ

3. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt ( ) and sealing bolt (1).

JPDIC0344ZZ

4. Temporarily tighten mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1).

JPDIC0343ZZ

5. Tighten mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1) to the specified


torque in the numerical order as shown in the figure.
6. Install transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and
Installation".
7. Refill gear oil. Refer to TM-17, "Refilling".

JPDIC0345ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-36 2009 G37 Convertible


FRONT OIL SEAL
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Inspection INFOID:0000000004802994

A
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection".
B

TM

Revision: 2010 March TM-37 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004802995

CASE AND EXTENSION

JPDIC0486GB

1. Breather tube 2. Bracket 3. Gasket


4. Filler plug 5. Front oil seal 6. Sealing bolt
7. Front cover 8. Front cover gasket 9. Transmission case
10. Drain plug 11. Baffle plate 12. Oil gutter
13. Magnet 14. Bearing retainer 15. Adapter plate

: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

: Apply Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants".
: Refer to "CASE AND EXTENSION" in TM-52, "Assembly" for the locations.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

Revision: 2010 March TM-38 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

TM

JPDIC0648GB
K

1. Rear extension upper cover 2. Rear extension upper cover gasket 3. Bracket
4. Rear extension 5. Plunger 6. Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch L
7. Oil gutter 8. Cap 9. Back-up lamp switch
10. Rear oil seal 11. Dust cover 12. Striking rod oil seal
13. Check ball 14. Check select spring M

: Apply gear oil.

: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". N
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

SHAFT AND GEAR O

Revision: 2010 March TM-39 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

JPDIC0492ZZ

1. Snap ring 2. Main drive gear bearing 3. Main drive gear


4. Main pilot bearing 5. Pilot bearing spacer 6. 5th baulk ring
7. 5th-6th spread spring 8. 5th-6th shifting insert 9. 5th-6th synchronizer hub
10. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 11. 6th baulk ring 12. 6th main gear
13. 6th needle bearing 14. Mainshaft 15. 2nd main gear
16. 2nd needle bearing 17. 2nd inner baulk ring 18. 2nd synchronizer cone
19. 2nd outer baulk ring 20. 1st-2nd spread spring 21. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
22. 1st-2nd shifting insert 23. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 24. 1st outer baulk ring
25. 1st synchronizer cone 26. 1st inner baulk ring 27. 1st main gear
28. 1st needle bearing 29. 1st gear bushing 30. 3rd main gear
31. 3rd-4th main spacer 32. 4th main gear 33. Mainshaft bearing
34. Reverse main gear 35. Reverse needle bearing 36. Reverse main gear bushing
37. Reverse baulk ring 38. Reverse spread spring 39. Reverse synchronizer hub
40. Reverse shifting insert 41. Reverse coupling sleeve
: Replace the parts as a set.

: Apply gear oil.


Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

• Apply gear oil to gears, shafts, synchronizers, and bearings when assembling.

Revision: 2010 March TM-40 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

TM

I
JPDIC0493ZZ

1. Counter front bearing 2. Counter shaft 3. 3rd gear bushing


J
4. 3rd needle bearing 5. 3rd counter gear 6. 3rd inner baulk ring
7. 3rd synchronizer cone 8. 3rd outer baulk ring 9. 3rd-4th spread spring
10. 3rd-4th shifting insert 11. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 12. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
K
13. 4th outer baulk ring 14. 4th synchronizer cone 15. 4th inner baulk ring
16. 4th gear bushing 17. 4th needle bearing 18. 4th counter gear
19. 4th counter gear thrust washer 20. Counter rear bearing inner race 21. Counter rear bearing
L
22. Counter rear bearing spacer 23. Reverse counter gear 24. Snap ring
25. Reverse idler shaft 26. Reverse idler needle bearing 27. Reverse idler gear
28. Reverse idler thrust washer
M
: Replace the parts as a set.

: Apply gear oil.


N
: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

• Apply gear oil to gears, shafts, synchronizers, and bearings when assembling. O
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
P

Revision: 2010 March TM-41 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

JPDIC0490GB

1. Check ball plug 2. Check ball spring 3. Check ball


4. Interlock pin 5. Interlock plunger 6. Retaining pin
7. 3rd-4th fork rod bracket 8. 3rd-4th fork rod 9. 1st-2nd fork rod
10. 1st-2nd shift fork 11. 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) 12. 3rd-4th shift fork
13. 5th-6th shift fork 14. 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side) 15. 5th-6th fork rod bracket
16. 5th-6th fork rod 17. 3rd-4th control lever 18. Shifter cap
19. 5th-6th control lever 20. Adapter plate

: Apply gear oil.


: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.

: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

Revision: 2010 March TM-42 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

TM

I
JPDIC0529ZZ

1. Striking lever 2. Retaining pin 3. Striking rod


J
4. Adapter plate 5. Stopper ring 6. Low/high control lever
7. Reverse fork rod 8. Reverse shift fork
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.
K

Revision: 2010 March TM-43 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

JPDIC0494GB

1. Control lever housing 2. Check shift pin 3. Control bracket


4. Return spring plug 5. Return spring plunger 6. Return spring
7. Rear extension 8. Boot 9. Control rod
10. Retaining pin 11. Control rod boot

: Apply gear oil.

: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

Disassembly INFOID:0000000004802996

CASE AND EXTENSION


1. Remove drain plug and gasket from transmission case and then drain gear oil.
2. Remove filler plug and gasket from transmission case.
3. Remove rear extension upper cover with the following procedure.
a. Remove rear extension upper cover mounting bolts while holding rear extension upper cover.
b. Remove rear extension upper cover and rear extension upper cover gasket from rear extension.

Revision: 2010 March TM-44 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
4. Remove check select spring and check ball from rear extension.
CAUTION: A
Never drop check ball.
5. Remove control rod with the following procedure.
a. Remove control rod boot from control rod. B

PCIB1344E

TM
b. Remove boot (1) from control rod as shown in the figure.
c. Remove retaining pin ( ) from control rod using a pin punch
[Commercial service tool] and then remove control rod from E
striking rod.
d. Remove boot from striking rod oil seal.
6. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and plunger from F
rear extension.
7. Remove back-up lamp switch from rear extension.
G
JPDIC0506ZZ

8. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and then remove control bracket H


from rear extension.

PCIB1346E
K
9. Remove return spring plungers (1), return springs (2), and return
spring plugs (3) from rear extension.
CAUTION: L
Return spring and return spring plunger have different
lengths for right and left sides. Identify right and left side
and then store. M

N
JPDIC0508ZZ

10. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension using the puller [SST: O
KV381054S0 (J-34286)].
CAUTION:
Never damage rear extension. P
11. Remove brackets from rear extension.
12. Remove control lever housing from rear extension.
CAUTION:
Never hold control lever housing to prevent the bushing of
control lever housing from deformation when moving trans-
mission assembly.
13. Remove rear extension from adapter plate using a soft hammer. PCIB1348E

Revision: 2010 March TM-45 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
CAUTION:
Never drop reverse idler thrust washer.
14. Remove striking rod oil seal from rear extension.
CAUTION:
Never damage rear extension.
15. Remove dust cover from rear extension.
CAUTION:
Never damage rear extension.
16. Remove oil gutter with the following procedure.
a. Remove oil gutter from rear extension.
b. Remove cap from oil gutter.
17. Remove reverse idler shaft assembly ( ) from adapter plate.

PCIB0152E

18. Remove front cover with the following procedure.


a. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1).
b. Remove front cover and front cover gasket from transmission
case.

JPDIC0343ZZ

c. Remove front oil seal from front cover using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
Never damage front cover.

SCIA1399E

19. Remove transmission case with the following procedure.

Revision: 2010 March TM-46 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
a. Remove baffle plate mounting nut ( ) from transmission case.
A

SCIA1443E

TM
b. Remove snap ring from main drive gear bearing using snap ring
pliers.
E

G
SCIA1532E

c. Carefully tap transmission case using a soft hammer (A) and


H
then separate adapter plate and transmission case.
CAUTION:
Never drop counter front bearing.
I

JSDIA0560ZZ
K
20. Remove counter front bearing (1) from transmission case.
21. Remove breather tube from transmission case.
CAUTION: L
Never damage transmission case.
22. Remove bracket from transmission case.
M

N
JSDIA0561ZZ

SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD O

Revision: 2010 March TM-47 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
1. Install adapter setting plate (A) [SST: ST22490000 ( - )] to
adapter plate and then fixing in adapter setting plate [SST:
ST22490000 ( - )] using a vise.
CAUTION:
Never directly secure the surface in a vise.
2. Remove baffle plate and oil gutter from adapter plate.
3. Remove magnet from adapter plate.

JPDIC0509ZZ

4. Remove check balls (1), check ball springs (2), and check ball
plugs (3) from adapter plate.
CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.

JPDIC0510ZZ

5. Remove 3rd-4th control lever (1) and shifter cap (2) from
adapter plate.
CAUTION:
Never lose shifter cap.

JPDIC0530ZZ

6. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove striking lever (1) and striking rod (2).

JPDIC0513ZZ

7. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove 3rd-4th shift fork (1) and 3rd-4th fork
rod (reversal side) (2).

JPDIC0516ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-48 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

8. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove 3rd-4th fork rod (1) and 3rd-4th fork A
rod bracket (2).

PCIB2046E
TM
9. Remove check balls (1) from adapter plate.

A : View from transmission rear side E


CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.
10. Remove interlock pin (2) from 1st-2nd fork rod. F
CAUTION:
Never drop interlock pin.
G
JPDIC0595ZZ

11. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser- H


vice tool] and then remove 1st-2nd shift fork (1) and 1st-2nd fork
rod (2).
I

JPDIC0514ZZ K

12. Remove interlock plunger (1) from adapter plate.


L
A : View from transmission rear side
13. Remove interlock pin (2) from reverse fork rod.
CAUTION: M
Never drop interlock pin.

JPDIC0594ZZ

O
14. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-
vice tool] and then remove reverse shift fork (1) and reverse fork
rod (2).
CAUTION: P
Never drop reverse coupling sleeve.

JPDIC0517ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-49 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
15. Remove check balls (1) from adapter plate.

A : View from transmission rear side


CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.

JPDIC0591ZZ

16. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove 5th-6th fork rod bracket (1) and 5th-
6th fork rod (2).

JPDIC0519ZZ

17. Remove 5th-6th control lever from adapter plate.

A : Projection

JPDIC0518ZZ

18. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork
rod (reversal side) (2).

JPDIC0520ZZ

SHAFT AND GEAR


1. Remove reverse synchronizer hub with the following procedure.
a. Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
b. Remove snap ring from reverse synchronizer hub.
c. Remove reverse spread spring, reverse shifting inserts, and reverse coupling sleeve from reverse syn-
chronizer hub.

Revision: 2010 March TM-50 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
d. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to reverse main gear.
e. Remove reverse synchronizer hub together with reverse main A
gear, reverse baulk ring, and reverse spread spring from main-
shaft using a puller [Commercial service tool].
2. Remove reverse needle bearing from mainshaft. B
3. Remove reverse counter gear with the following procedure.
a. Remove snap ring from counter shaft.
C

SCIA1683E

TM
b. Remove reverse counter gear from counter shaft using a puller
[Commercial service tool].
4. Remove counter rear bearing spacer from counter shaft. E

G
SCIA1682E

5. Remove mounting bolts ( ) and then remove bearing retainer H


from adapter plate.

PCIB1238E
K
6. Remove snap ring from mainshaft bearing.

N
SCIA1691E

7. Carefully tap mainshaft with a plastic hammer and then remove O


mainshaft assembly, main drive gear assembly, and counter
shaft assembly combined in one unit from adapter plate.
P

SCIA1456E

Revision: 2010 March TM-51 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
8. Remove counter rear bearing (1) from adapter plate.
9. Remove adapter plate from adapter setting plate [SST:
ST22490000 ( - )].

JSDIA0565ZZ

Assembly INFOID:0000000004802997

SHAFT AND GEAR


1. Install main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly, and
counter shaft assembly combined in one unit to adapter plate
using a brass bar.

PCIB0151E

2. Install the adapter setting plate [SST] to adapter plate and then
fixing in adapter setting plate [SST] using a vise.
CAUTION:
Never directly secure the surface in a vise.

PCIB1266E

3. Install snap ring to mainshaft bearing.


CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
4. Apply recommended grease to roller of counter rear bearing.

SCIA1691E

Revision: 2010 March TM-52 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
5. Install counter rear bearing to adapter plate using the drift [SST].
CAUTION: A
Replace counter rear bearing inner race, counter rear bear-
ing, and counter rear bearing spacer as a set.
6. Install bearing retainer with the following procedure. B
a. Apply thread locking sealant to the end of bearing retainer
mounting bolts (first 3 to 4 threads).
• Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or
C
an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: PCIB1375E

Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. TM

b. Install bearing retainer to adapter plate and then tighten mount-


ing bolts ( ) to the specified torque. E
7. Install reverse synchronizer hub with the following procedure.
a. Install reverse coupling sleeve and reverse shifting inserts to
reverse synchronizer hub. F

PCIB1238E

H
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of reverse coupling sleeve.
I
: Reverse main gear side

• Never reuse reverse coupling sleeve and reverse syn-


chronizer hub. J
• Replace reverse coupling sleeve and reverse synchro-
nizer hub as a set.
K

JPDIC0569ZZ

L
• Be careful with the orientation of reverse synchronizer
hub.
M
A : Reverse main gear side
B : Snap ring side

O
JPDIC0570ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-53 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Be careful with the shape of reverse shifting insert.

PCIB0608E

b. Install reverse spread springs to reverse shifting inserts.


CAUTION:
Never install reverse spread spring hook onto the same
reverse shifting insert.

SCIA1600E

c. Install snap ring to reverse synchronizer hub.


CAUTION:
• Never reuse snap ring.
• Never align snap ring notch ( ) with synchronizer hub
groove when assembling.

PCIB1237E

Revision: 2010 March TM-54 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
8. Install reverse synchronizer hub assembly (1) with the following
procedure. A

2 : Collar of mainshaft
3 : 6th main gear B
4 : 2nd main gear
B : Drift [SST: ST01530000 ( - )]
a. Set the press plate (A) [SST: KV32103300 (J-46529)] to main- C
shaft as shown in the figure.
b. Apply gear oil to reverse needle bearing and reverse baulk ring.
c. Install reverse needle bearing, reverse main gear, and reverse TM
baulk ring to mainshaft.

G
JPDIC0571ZZ

NOTE: H
Reverse baulk ring has three spaces that two gear teeth are
missing, and each space has small ditch for identification as
shown in the figure.
d. Install reverse synchronizer hub assembly to mainshaft with a I
pressing machine using the drift [SST: ST01530000 ( - )].

K
PCIB0168E

CAUTION: L
Be careful with the orientation of reverse coupling sleeve.

: Reverse main gear side


M

O
JPDIC0569ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-55 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
9. Select and install snap ring (1) so that the end play “L” of main-
shaft is adjusted to the standard value. For selecting snap ring,
refer to the latest parts information.

2 : Reverse synchronizer hub

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".

JPDIC0527ZZ

10. Install reverse counter gear with the following procedure.


a. Install counter rear bearing spacer to counter shaft.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of counter rear bearing
spacer.

: Counter rear bearing side

• Replace counter rear bearing inner race, counter rear


bearing, and counter rear bearing spacer as a set.

JPDIC0577ZZ

b. Install reverse counter gear (1) to counter shaft with a pressing


machine using the drift (A) [SST: ST23860000 ( - )].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse reverse counter gear.

JSDIA0573ZZ

• Be careful with the orientation of reverse counter gear.

: Counter rear bearing side

JPDIC0585ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-56 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
11. Select and install snap ring (1) so that the end play “L” of counter
shaft is adjusted to the standard value. For selecting snap ring, A
refer to the latest parts information.

2 : Reverse counter gear


B

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".


C

JPDIC0528ZZ

TM
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
1. Install 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side)
(2) and then install retaining pin ( ) to 5th-6th shift fork using a E
pin punch [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th shift fork and F
5th-6th fork rod (reversal side).
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur- G
face of 5th-6th shift fork.
JPDIC0520ZZ

H
2. Install 5th-6th control lever to adapter plate and then tighten
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Set the projection (A) upward. I

K
JPDIC0518ZZ

3. Install 5th-6th fork rod bracket (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (2) and
then install retaining pin ( ) to 5th-6th fork rod bracket using a L
pin punch [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin. M
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th fork rod bracket
and 5th-6th fork rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur- N
face of 5th-6th fork rod bracket.
JPDIC0519ZZ
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-57 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
4. Apply recommended grease to check balls (1) and then install
its to adapter plate.

A : View from transmission rear side


CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.
5. Apply recommended grease to interlock pin and then install it to
reverse fork rod.
CAUTION:
Never drop interlock pin.
JPDIC0591ZZ

6. Install reverse shift fork (1) and reverse fork rod (2) and then
install retaining pin ( ) to reverse shift fork using a pin punch
[Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of reverse shift fork and
reverse fork rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of reverse shift fork.
• Never drop reverse coupling sleeve. JPDIC0517ZZ

7. Apply recommended grease to interlock plunger (1) and then


install it to adapter plate.

A : View from transmission rear side


8. Apply recommended grease to interlock pin and then install it to
1st-2nd fork rod.
CAUTION:
Never drop interlock pin.

JPDIC0535ZZ

9. Install 1st-2nd shift fork (1) and 1st-2nd fork rod (2) and then
install retaining pin ( ) to 1st-2nd shift fork using a pin punch
[Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd shift fork and
1st-2nd fork rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of 1st-2nd shift fork.
JPDIC0514ZZ

10. Apply recommended grease to check balls (1) and then install
its to adapter plate.

A : View from transmission rear side


CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.

JPDIC0536ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-58 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
11. Install 3rd-4th fork rod bracket (1) and 3rd-4th fork rod (2) and
then install retaining pin ( ) to 3rd-4th fork rod bracket using a A
pin punch [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin. B
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th fork rod bracket.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of 3rd-4th fork rod bracket. C

JPDIC0515ZZ
TM
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th fork rod.

: Transmission front E
A : View from transmission top side

G
JPDIC0579ZZ

12. Install 3rd-4th shift fork (1) and 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) H
(2) and then install retaining pin ( ) to 3rd-4th shift fork using a
pin punch [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION: I
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th shift fork.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur- J
face of 3rd-4th shift fork.

JPDIC0516ZZ K

• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal


side). L

: Transmission front
A : Short M
B : Long

JPDIC0581ZZ

O
13. Install 3rd-4th control lever (1) and shifter cap (2) to adapter
plate and then tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th control lever. P
• Never lose shifter cap.

JPDIC0530ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-59 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
14. Install striking lever (1) and striking rod (2) and then install
retaining pin ( ) to striking lever using a pin punch [Commercial
service tool].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of striking lever and strik-
ing rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of striking lever.
JPDIC0513ZZ

15. Apply gear oil to check balls (1) and then install check balls and
check ball springs (2) to adapter plate.
CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.
16. Apply recommended sealant to threads of check ball plugs (3)
and then tighten its to the specified torque.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
JPDIC0510ZZ

17. Install baffle plate with the following procedure.


a. Insert baffle plate (1) until its projection contacts groove (A) of oil
gutter (2).

JPDIC0538ZZ

b. Align baffle plate hole to adapter plate dowel pin ( ).

JPDIC0540ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-60 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
c. Install mounting bolt ( ) to adapter plate and then tighten
mounting bolt to the specified torque. A
18. Remove adapter plate assembly from vise.
CAUTION:
Never damage baffle plate. B
19. Remove adapter setting plate [SST: ST22490000 ( - )] from
adapter plate.
C

JPDIC0539ZZ

TM
CASE AND EXTENSION
1. Install breather tube (1) to transmission case.
E
Dimension “L” : 2 mm (0.08 in) or less
CAUTION:
Never bend breather tube. F

JPDIC0542ZZ

H
2. Install transmission case with the following procedure.
a. Install counter front bearing (1) to transmission case.
b. Apply recommended grease to roller of counter front bearing. I

JSDIA0561ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-61 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
c. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of transmission
case as shown in the figure.

A : Start and finish point shall be in the center of two bolts.

Dimension “B” : 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)


Sealant width “C” : 1 – 2 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height “C” : 0.4 – 1 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION:
• Remove old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces.
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adher-
ing to both mounting surfaces.
• Apply sealant so as not to break the bead.
d. Install magnet to adapter plate.

JPDIC0543ZZ

e. Install transmission case to adapter plate.


CAUTION:
• Check for baffle plate weld bolt location while installing.
• Check that magnet is within the specified area of adapter
plate while installing.
• Never drop counter front bearing.
NOTE:
Apply grease to magnet if it is difficult to keep magnet within the
specified area of adapter plate.

JPDIC0548ZZ

f. Install snap ring to main drive gear bearing using snap ring pli-
ers.
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.

SCIA1532E

3. Install baffle plate with the following procedure.

Revision: 2010 March TM-62 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
a. Tighten baffle plate mounting nut ( ) to the specified torque.
A

SCIA1443E

TM
b. Install mounting bolt ( ) to adapter plate and then tighten
mounting bolt to the specified torque.
E

G
JPDIC0652ZZ

4. Install front cover with the following procedure.


H
a. Install front oil seal (1) to front cover using the drift (A) [SST:
KV38102100 (J-25803-01)].

Dimension “H” : 8.55 – 9.55 mm (0.3366 – 0.3760 in) I

CAUTION:
Never incline front oil seal.
J
b. Install front cover gasket and front cover to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse front cover gasket.
• Never damage front oil seal. K
• Remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
both mating surfaces.
L

JPDIC0586ZZ
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-63 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
c. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt ( ) and sealing bolt (1).

JPDIC0344ZZ

d. Temporarily tighten mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1).

JPDIC0343ZZ

e. Tighten mounting bolts ( ) and sealing bolts (1) to the specified


torque in the numerical order as shown in the figure.

JPDIC0345ZZ

5. Install reverse idler shaft assembly ( ) to adapter plate.


6. Install rear extension with the following procedure.
a. Install oil gutter with the following procedure.
i. Seat the prong of oil gutter in the groove on cap.

PCIB0152E

ii. Install oil gutter (1) to rear extension and then tighten mounting
bolt to the specified torque.

JPDIC0547ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-64 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
b. Install striking rod oil seal to rear extension using the drift [SST:
ST33061000 (J-8107-2)]. A
CAUTION:
• Never reuse striking rod oil seal.
• Never incline striking rod oil seal. B
c. Install dust cover to rear extension.

PCIB0213E
TM
d. Install rear oil seal (1) to rear extension using the drift [SST:
ST33400001 (J-26082)].
E
Dimension “H” : 1.2 – 2.2 mm (0.047 – 0.087 in)
CAUTION:
Never incline rear oil seal. F

G
JPDIC0587ZZ

e. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of rear extension H


as shown in the figure.

A : Start and finish point shall be in the center of two bolts.


I

Dimension “B” : 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)


Sealant width “C” : 1 – 2 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in) J
Sealant height “C” : 0.4 – 1 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". K
CAUTION:
• Remove old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces.
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adher- L
ing to both mounting surfaces.
• Apply sealant so as not to break the bead.

N
JPDIC0544ZZ

f. Install rear extension to adapter plate and then tighten mounting O


bolts ( ) to the specified torque in the numerical order as
shown in the figure.
CAUTION: P
Never damage rear oil seal and striking rod oil seal.
7. Install control lever housing to rear extension and then tighten
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never hold control lever housing to prevent the bushing of
control lever housing from deformation when moving trans-
mission assembly. JPDIC0575ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-65 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
8. Install return spring plug with the following procedure.
a. Apply gear oil to return spring plungers (1).
b. Install return spring plungers and return springs (2) to rear
extension.

Region Return spring identification mark Plunger groove


RH Brown Without
LH Blue With
CAUTION:
The right and left return springs and return spring plungers
JPDIC0508ZZ
are different, so make sure they are installed correctly.
c. Apply recommended sealant to threads of return spring plugs (3) and then tighten its to the specified
torque.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.

9. Install control bracket to rear extension and then tighten mount-


ing bolts ( ) to the specified torque.

PCIB1346E

10. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch with the following procedure.
a. Install plunger to rear extension.
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of plunger.

: Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch side

JPDIC0653ZZ

b. Temporarily tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch onto rear


extension by rotating once or twice.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
c. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position
(PNP) switch as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
d. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch to the specified
torque.
JPDIC0526ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-66 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
11. Install back-up lamp switch with the following procedure.
a. Temporarily tighten back-up lamp switch onto rear extension by A
rotating once or twice.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. B
b. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch
as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or an equivalent. Refer to GI-
C
17, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
c. Tighten back-up lamp switch to the specified torque.
12. Install control rod with the following procedure. TM
JPDIC0526ZZ
a. Install boot to striking rod oil seal and then install control rod to
striking rod.
CAUTION:
E
• Be careful with the orientation of control rod.

: Transmission front
A : View from transmission top side F

H
JPDIC0596ZZ

• Be careful with the orientation of boot (1).


I
: Transmission front
2 : Striking rod oil seal
J

JPDIC0629ZZ
L
b. Install retaining pin ( ) to control rod using a pin punch [Com-
mercial service tool].
M
1 : Boot
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin. N
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of control rod.
O
JPDIC0506ZZ

c. Install boot to control rod.


P
CAUTION:

Revision: 2010 March TM-67 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Be careful with the orientation of boot.

A : View from transmission rear side


• Fit control rod boot to the groove on control rod.
d. Install control rod boot to control rod.
CAUTION:
Fit control rod boot to the groove on control rod.

JPDIC0597ZZ

13. Install brackets with the following procedure.


a. Install bracket (1) so that it contacts transmission case rib (A)
and then tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of bracket.
b. Install bracket (2) so that it contacts rear extension side (B) and
then tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
c. Install bracket (3) to rear extension and then tighten mounting
bolts to the specified torque.
d. Install bracket (4) so that it contacts the projection (C) of rear
extension and then tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
JPDIC0655ZZ
e. Install bracket (5) to rear extension and then tighten mounting
bolt to the specified torque.
f. Install bracket (1) so that it contacts rear extension side (A) and
then tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
g. Install bracket (2) to rear extension and then tighten mounting
bolts to the specified torque.
14. Install rear extension upper cover with the following procedure.
a. Apply gear oil to check ball.
CAUTION:
Never drop check ball.

JPDIC0656ZZ

b. Install check ball and check select spring to rear extension.


c. Install rear extension upper cover gasket and rear extension
upper cover to rear extension.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear extension upper cover gasket.
• Remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
both mating surfaces.
d. Temporarily tighten rear extension upper cover mounting bolts
while holding rear extension upper cover.
CAUTION:
Avoid tangling check select spring. PCIB1344E

Revision: 2010 March TM-68 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
e. Tighten mounting bolts ( ) to the specified torque in the numer-
ical order as shown in the figure. A
15. Install drain plug with the following procedure.
a. Install gasket to drain plug and then install it to transmission
case. B
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
b. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. C
16. Install filler plug with the following procedure.
a. Install gasket to filler plug and then install it to transmission JPDIC0576ZZ

case. TM
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
b. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. E
CAUTION:
After gear oil is filled, tighten filler plug to the specified torque.
Inspection INFOID:0000000004802998 F

INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY


G
Shaft
Before disassembly, measure the end play “L” for each position. If the end play is outside the standard value,
disassemble and inspect.
• Mainshaft H

1 : Snap ring
2 : Reverse synchronizer hub I

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".


J

JPDIC0527ZZ
K

• Counter shaft
L
1 : Snap ring
2 : Reverse counter gear
M
End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".

JPDIC0528ZZ

O
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Case and Plate
• Check the bearing mounting surface for wear, cracks, and damages. Replace if necessary. P
• Check the mating surface for wear, cracks, and damages. Replace if necessary.
Extension and Cover
• Check the oil seal mounting surface for wear, cracks, and damages. Replace if necessary.
• Check the mating surface for wear, cracks, and damages. Replace if necessary.
Gear
Check the gears for any damage, scaling, or uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Revision: 2010 March TM-69 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve
• Check the contact surface of the coupling sleeve, synchronizer
hub, and shifting inserts for damage and uneven wear. Replace if
necessary.
• The coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub moves smoothly.

SMT387A

Baulk Ring and Spread Spring


• Check the cam surface and contact surface of the baulk ring for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
• Check the spread springs for damage. Replace if necessary.

SCIA0608J

Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (Reverse)


Measure the clearance “A” when pressing the baulk ring (1) against
the cone (B) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or more on the oppo-
site side using a feeler gauge (C), and then calculate the mean
value. Replace if outside the limit value.

Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance".

JPDIC0605ZZ

Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if necessary.

Revision: 2010 March TM-70 2009 G37 Convertible


MAIN DRIVE GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
MAIN DRIVE GEAR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004802999

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". B


Disassembly INFOID:0000000004803000

1. Remove 5th baulk ring, pilot bearing spacer, and main pilot bearing from main drive gear. C
2. Remove snap ring from main drive gear using snap ring pliers.

TM

F
SCIA1461E

3. Remove main drive gear bearing with the following procedure. G


a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to main drive gear bear-
ing.
b. Remove main drive gear bearing from main drive gear with a H
pressing machine.
CAUTION:
Never drop main drive gear. I

J
SCIA1533E

Assembly INFOID:0000000004803001
K

1. Install main drive gear bearing (1) to main drive gear with a
pressing machine using the drift (A) [SST: KV32102700 ( - )].
L

JPDIC0598ZZ

O
CAUTION:

Revision: 2010 March TM-71 2009 G37 Convertible


MAIN DRIVE GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Be careful with the orientation of main drive gear bearing.

: Snap ring side

JPDIC0599ZZ

2. Select and install snap ring (1) to main drive gear so that the end
play “L” is adjusted to the standard value. For selecting snap
ring, refer to the latest parts information.

2 : Main drive gear bearing

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".


3. Apply gear oil to main pilot bearing and 5th baulk ring.

JPDIC0550ZZ

4. Install main pilot bearing, pilot bearing spacer, and 5th baulk ring to main drive gear.
NOTE:
5th and 6th baulk rings have three spaces that four gear teeth
are missing as shown in the figure.

PCIB1309J

Inspection INFOID:0000000004803002

INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY


Gear
Before disassembly, measure the end play “L”. If the end play is out-
side the standard value, disassemble and inspect.

1 : Snap ring
2 : Main drive gear bearing

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play".

JPDIC0550ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY


Gear

Revision: 2010 March TM-72 2009 G37 Convertible


MAIN DRIVE GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Check the gear for any damage, scaling, or uneven wear. Replace if
necessary. A

JPDIC0029ZZ

TM
Baulk Ring
Check the cam surface and contact surface of the baulk ring for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
E

G
SCIA0608J

Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (5th) H


Measure the clearance “A” when pressing the baulk ring (1) against
the cone (B) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or more on the oppo-
site side using a feeler gauge (C), and then calculate the mean
value. Replace if outside the limit value. I

Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance". J

K
JPDIC0605ZZ

Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if L
necessary.

SMT418A O

Revision: 2010 March TM-73 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004803003

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".


Disassembly INFOID:0000000004803004

1. Remove 4th main gear with the following procedure.


a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 4th main gear.
b. Remove mainshaft bearing and reverse main gear bushing
together with 4th main gear from mainshaft with a pressing
machine.
CAUTION:
Never drop mainshaft.
2. Remove 3rd-4th main spacer from mainshaft.

SCIA1386E

3. Remove 1st main gear with the following procedure.


a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 1st main gear.
b. Remove 3rd main gear together with 1st main gear from main-
shaft with a pressing machine.
CAUTION:
• Never damage 1st outer baulk ring.
• Never drop mainshaft.
4. Remove 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st inner
baulk ring, and 1st needle bearing from mainshaft.

SCIA1458E

5. Remove 2nd main gear with the following procedure.


a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 2nd main gear.
CAUTION:
Set V-block in the position where V-block does not contact
with collar of mainshaft.
b. Remove 1st gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly,
2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd inner
baulk together with 2nd main gear from mainshaft with a press-
ing machine.
CAUTION:
• Never damage mainshaft.
• Never drop mainshaft. SCIA1459E

6. Remove 1st-2nd spread springs, 1st-2nd shifting inserts, and


1st-2nd coupling sleeve from 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
7. Remove 2nd needle bearing from mainshaft.

Revision: 2010 March TM-74 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
8. Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
A

PCIB1244E

TM
9. Remove 6th main gear with the following procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 6th main gear.
CAUTION: E
Set V-block in the position where V-block does not contact
with collar of mainshaft.
b. Remove 6th baulk ring and 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly
F
together with 6th main gear from mainshaft with a pressing
machine.
CAUTION:
• Never damage mainshaft. G
• Never drop mainshaft.
10. Remove 5th-6th spread springs, 5th-6th shifting inserts, and 5th- SCIA1460E

6th coupling sleeve from 5th-6th synchronizer hub. H


11. Remove 6th needle bearing from mainshaft.
Assembly INFOID:0000000004803005
I
1. Apply gear oil to 6th needle bearing and 6th baulk ring.
2. Install 6th needle bearing, 6th main gear, and 6th baulk ring to mainshaft.
J
NOTE:
5th and 6th baulk rings have three spaces that four gear teeth
are missing as shown in the figure.
K

M
PCIB1309J

3. Install 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly with the following procedure. N


a. Install 5th-6th coupling sleeve and 5th-6th shifting inserts to 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th coupling sleeve. O

: 6th main gear side

• Never reuse 5th-6th coupling sleeve and 5th-6th synchro- P


nizer hub.
• Replace 5th-6th coupling sleeve and 5th-6th synchronizer
hub as a set.

JPDIC0549ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-75 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th synchronizer
hub.

A : 5th main gear side


B : 6th main gear side

JPDIC0554ZZ

• Be careful with the shape of 5th-6th shifting insert.

PCIB0608E

b. Install 5th-6th spread springs to 5th-6th shifting inserts.


CAUTION:
Never install 5th-6th spread spring hook onto the same 5th-
6th shifting insert.

SCIA1600E

c. Install 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly to mainshaft with a


pressing machine using the inserter (A) [SST: ST30911000 ( - )].

JPDIC0645ZZ

CAUTION:

Revision: 2010 March TM-76 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
A
: 6th main gear side

JPDIC0549ZZ

TM
4. Select and install snap ring (1) to mainshaft so that the end play
“L” of mainshaft is adjusted to the standard value. For selecting
snap ring, refer to the latest parts information.
E
2 : 5th-6th synchronizer hub

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play". F

5. Apply gear oil to 2nd needle bearing, 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd
synchronizer cone, and 2nd outer baulk ring.
G
CAUTION: JPDIC0556ZZ
Replace 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and
2nd outer baulk ring as a set.
6. Install 2nd needle bearing, 2nd main gear, 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd outer H
baulk ring to mainshaft.
NOTE:
1st outer baulk ring has three spaces that four gear teeth are I
missing and 2nd outer baulk ring has three spaces that two gear
teeth are missing.
J
A : 1st outer baulk ring
B : 2nd outer baulk ring

JPDIC0600ZZ L
7. Install 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly with the following procedure.
a. Install 1st-2nd coupling sleeve and 1st-2nd shifting inserts to 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
M
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.

: 2nd main gear side N

• Never reuse 1st-2nd coupling sleeve and 1st-2nd syn-


chronizer hub.
• Replace 1st-2nd coupling sleeve and 1st-2nd synchro- O
nizer hub as a set.

P
JPDIC0557ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-77 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd synchronizer
hub.

A : 2nd main gear side


B : 1st main gear side

JPDIC0558ZZ

• Be careful with the shape of 1st-2nd shifting insert.

PCIB0608E

b. Install 1st-2nd spread springs to 1st-2nd shifting inserts.


CAUTION:
Never install 1st-2nd spread spring hook onto the same 1st-
2nd shifting insert.

SCIA1600E

c. Install 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly (1) to mainshaft with


a pressing machine using the support ring (A) [SST:
ST27861000 ( - )].

2 : 2nd main gear

JPDIC0593ZZ

CAUTION:

Revision: 2010 March TM-78 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
A
: 2nd main gear side

JPDIC0557ZZ

TM
8. Install 1st gear bushing (1) to mainshaft with a pressing machine
using the support ring (A) [SST: ST27861000 ( - )].
9. Apply gear oil to 1st needle bearing, 1st outer baulk ring, 1st
E
synchronizer cone, and 1st inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Replace 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and
1st inner baulk ring as a set. F

G
JPDIC0646ZZ

10. Install 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st inner baulk ring, 1st needle bearing, and 1st main
gear to mainshaft. H
NOTE:
1st outer baulk ring has three spaces that four gear teeth are
missing and 2nd outer baulk ring has three spaces that two gear I
teeth are missing.

A : 1st outer baulk ring


J
B : 2nd outer baulk ring

JPDIC0600ZZ

L
11. Install 3rd main gear (1) to mainshaft with a pressing machine
using the inserter (A) [SST: ST30022000 ( - )].

2 : 1st main gear M

O
JPDIC0561ZZ

CAUTION:
P

Revision: 2010 March TM-79 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Be careful with the orientation of 3rd main gear.

: 1st main gear side

JPDIC0560ZZ

12. Install 3rd-4th main spacer (1) to mainshaft.


13. Install 4th main gear (2) to mainshaft with a pressing machine
using the inserter (A) [SST: ST30022000 ( - )].

JPDIC0563ZZ

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 4th main gear.

: 3rd-4th main spacer side

JPDIC0562ZZ

14. Install mainshaft bearing (1) to mainshaft with a pressing


machine using the inserter (A) [SST: ST30911000 ( - )].

JPDIC0565ZZ

CAUTION:

Revision: 2010 March TM-80 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
Be careful with the orientation of mainshaft bearing.
A
: 4th main gear side

JPDIC0564ZZ

TM
15. Install reverse main gear bushing to mainshaft with a pressing
machine using the inserter [SST: ST30911000 ( - )].
E

G
PCIB0206E

Inspection INFOID:0000000004803006

H
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
Shaft
I
Before disassembly, measure the end play “L”. If the end play is out-
side the standard value, disassemble and inspect.

1 : Snap ring J
2 : 5th-6th synchronizer hub

End play “L” : Refer to TM-96, "End Play". K

L
JPDIC0556ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY


Shaft and Gear M
• Check the shaft for damage or bend. Replace if necessary.
• Check the gears for any damage, scaling, or uneven wear.
Replace if necessary. N

P
JPDIC0391ZZ

Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve

Revision: 2010 March TM-81 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Check the contact surface of the coupling sleeve, synchronizer
hub, and shifting inserts for damage and uneven wear. Replace if
necessary.
• The coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub moves smoothly.

SMT387A

Baulk Ring and Spread Spring


• Check the cam surface and contact surface of the baulk ring for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
• Check the spread springs for damage. Replace if necessary.

SCIA0608J

Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (6th)


Measure the clearance “A” when pressing the baulk ring (1) against
the cone (B) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or more on the oppo-
site side using a feeler gauge (C), and then calculate the mean
value. Replace if outside the limit value.

Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance".

JPDIC0605ZZ

Baulk Ring Clearance for Triple Cone Synchronizer (1st and 2nd)
Measure the clearance of outer baulk ring (1), synchronizer cone (2),
and inner baulk ring (3) with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
manage the clearances “A”, “B”, and “C” as a set. Therefore,
replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.

JPDIC0308ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-82 2009 G37 Convertible


MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
1. Measure the clearance “A” when pressing the outer baulk ring
(1) against the cone (C) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or A
more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge (B), and then
calculate the mean value.
B
2 : Synchronizer cone
3 : Inner baulk ring

C
Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
JPDIC0034ZZ

TM
2. Measure the clearance “B“ at 2 points or more on the opposite
side using a feeler gauge (A), and then calculate the mean
value. E
1 : Outer baulk ring
2 : Synchronizer cone
F

Clearance “B” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance".
G
JPDIC0307ZZ

3. Measure the clearance “C” when pressing the outer baulk ring H
(1) against the cone (B) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or
more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge (A), and then
calculate the mean value.
I
2 : Synchronizer cone
3 : Inner baulk ring
J
Clearance “C” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
JPDIC0035ZZ K
Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if
necessary. L

SMT418A
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-83 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004803007

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".


Disassembly INFOID:0000000004803008

1. Remove 3rd counter gear with the following procedure.


a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 3rd counter gear.
b. Remove the parts below together with 3rd counter gear from
counter shaft with a pressing machine.

·Counter rear bearing inner race


·4th counter gear thrust washer
·4th counter gear
·4th needle bearing
·4th gear bushing
·4th inner baulk ring SCIA1389E
·4th synchronizer cone
·4th outer baulk ring
·3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly
·3rd outer baulk ring
·3rd synchronizer cone
·3rd inner baulk ring
CAUTION:
Never drop counter shaft.
2. Remove 3rd-4th spread springs, 3rd-4th shifting inserts, and 3rd-4th coupling sleeve from 3rd-4th syn-
chronizer hub.
3. Remove 3rd needle bearing from counter shaft.
4. Remove 3rd gear bushing with the following procedure.
a. Set a puller [Commercial service tool] to 3rd gear bushing.
b. Remove 3rd gear bushing from counter shaft with a pressing
machine.
CAUTION:
• Never use oil hole of 3rd gear bushing when press out.
• Never drop counter shaft.

PCIB1327E

Assembly INFOID:0000000004803009

1. Install 3rd gear bushing to counter shaft with a pressing machine


using the inserter [SST: ST30911000 ( - )].

PCIB0406E

Revision: 2010 March TM-84 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

CAUTION: A
Be careful with the orientation of 3rd gear bushing.

: 4th counter gear side


B
2. Apply gear oil to 3rd needle bearing, 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd
synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring.
CAUTION: C
Replace 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, and
3rd outer baulk ring as a set.
3. Install 3rd needle bearing, 3rd counter gear, 3rd inner baulk ring,
TM
3rd synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring to counter shaft. JPDIC0584ZZ

NOTE: E
4th outer baulk ring has three spaces that one gear tooth is
missing but 3rd outer baulk ring doesn't.

A : 3rd outer baulk ring F


B : 4th outer baulk ring

H
JPDIC0601ZZ

4. Install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly with the following procedure.


a. Install 3rd-4th coupling sleeve and 3rd-4th shifting inserts to 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. I
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the shape of 3rd-4th shifting insert.
• Never reuse 3rd-4th coupling sleeve and 3rd-4th synchro- J
nizer hub.
• Replace 3rd-4th coupling sleeve and 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub as a set.
K

PCIB0608E

M
b. Install 3rd-4th spread springs to 3rd-4th shifting inserts.
CAUTION:
Never install 3rd-4th spread spring hook onto the same 3rd-
4th shifting insert. N
c. Apply gear oil to the hole spline press fitting side of 3rd-4th syn-
chronizer hub.
O

SCIA1600E

Revision: 2010 March TM-85 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
d. Install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly (1) to counter shaft
with a pressing machine using the inserter (A) [SST:
ST30911000 ( - )].

2 : 3rd counter gear

JPDIC0567ZZ

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.

: 3rd counter gear side

JPDIC0566ZZ

5. Install 4th counter gear thrust washer with the following procedure.
a. Set 4th counter gear thrust washer (1), 4th gear bushing, 4th
needle bearing, and 4th counter gear to the inserter (A) [SST:
KV40100630 (J-26092)].

2 : 4th counter gear

JPDIC0592ZZ

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 4th counter gear thrust
washer.

: 4th counter gear side

b. Apply gear oil to 4th needle bearing, 4th outer baulk ring, 4th
synchronizer cone, and 4th inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Replace 4th outer baulk ring, 4th synchronizer cone, and
4th inner baulk ring as a set.
c. Install 4th outer baulk ring, 4th synchronizer cone, and 4th inner JPDIC0583ZZ
baulk ring to 4th counter gear.
NOTE:

Revision: 2010 March TM-86 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
4th outer baulk ring has three spaces that one gear tooth is
missing but 3rd outer baulk ring doesn't. A

A : 3rd outer baulk ring


B : 4th outer baulk ring B
d. Install 4th gear bushing, 4th needle bearing, and 4th counter
gear together with 4th counter gear thrust washer to counter
shaft with a pressing machine. C

JPDIC0601ZZ

TM
6. Install counter rear bearing inner race (1) to counter shaft with a
pressing machine using the inserter (A) [SST: ST30032000 (J-
26010-01)].
E
CAUTION:
• Replace counter rear bearing inner race, counter rear
bearing, and counter rear bearing spacer as a set.
F

G
JPDIC0390ZZ

• Be careful with the orientation of counter rear bearing H


inner race.

: 4th counter gear side I

JPDIC0582ZZ K

Inspection INFOID:0000000004803010

L
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shaft and Gear
• Check the shaft for damage or bend. Replace if necessary. M
• Check the gears for any damage, scaling, or uneven wear.
Replace if necessary.
N

JPDIC0392ZZ P
Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve

Revision: 2010 March TM-87 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Check the contact surface of the coupling sleeve, synchronizer
hub, and shifting inserts for damage and uneven wear. Replace if
necessary.
• The coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub moves smoothly.

SMT387A

Baulk Ring and Spread Spring


• Check the cam surface and contact surface of the baulk ring for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
• Check the spread springs for damage. Replace if necessary.

SCIA0608J

Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (4th)


Measure the clearance of outer baulk ring (1), synchronizer cone (2),
and inner baulk ring (3) with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
manage the clearances “A” and “B” as a set. Therefore, replace
them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit value.

JPDIC0305ZZ

1. Measure the clearance “A” at 2 points or more on the opposite


side using a dial indicator (B) and the puller (C) [SST:
ST30031000 (J-22912-01)], and then calculate the mean value.

1 : Inner baulk ring


2 : Synchronizer cone

Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance".
JPDIC0306ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-88 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
2. Measure the clearance “B” at 2 points or more on the opposite
side using a feeler gauge (A), and then calculate the mean A
value.

1 : Outer baulk ring


B
2 : Synchronizer cone

Clearance “B” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear- C


ance".
JPDIC0307ZZ

TM
Baulk Ring Clearance for Triple Cone Synchronizer (3rd)
Measure the clearance of outer baulk ring (1), synchronizer cone (2),
and inner baulk ring (3) with the following procedure.
CAUTION: E
The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
manage the clearances “A”, “B”, and “C” as a set. Therefore,
replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit F
value.

G
JPDIC0308ZZ

H
1. Measure the clearance “A” when pressing the outer baulk ring
(1) against the cone (C) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or
more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge (B), and then
calculate the mean value. I

2 : Synchronizer cone
3 : Inner baulk ring J

Clearance “A” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance". K
JPDIC0034ZZ

2. Measure the clearance “B“ at 2 points or more on the opposite


L
side using a feeler gauge (A), and then calculate the mean
value.

1 : Outer baulk ring M


2 : Synchronizer cone

Clearance “B” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear- N


ance".
JPDIC0307ZZ
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-89 2009 G37 Convertible


COUNTER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
3. Measure the clearance “C” when pressing the outer baulk ring
(1) against the cone (B) of clutch gear by hands at 2 points or
more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge (A), and then
calculate the mean value.

2 : Synchronizer cone
3 : Inner baulk ring

Clearance “C” : Refer to TM-96, "Baulk Ring Clear-


ance".
JPDIC0035ZZ

Bearing
Check the bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if
necessary.

SMT418A

Revision: 2010 March TM-90 2009 G37 Convertible


REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004803011

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". B


Disassembly INFOID:0000000004803012

1. Remove reverse idler thrust washer from reverse idler shaft. C


2. Remove reverse idler gear from reverse idler shaft.
3. Remove reverse idler needle bearing from reverse idler shaft.
TM
Assembly INFOID:0000000004803013

Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.


CAUTION: E
Apply gear oil to reverse idler needle bearing.
Inspection INFOID:0000000004803014
F

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY


Shaft and Gear G
• Check the shaft for damage or bend. Replace if necessary.
• Check the gear for any damage, scaling, or uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Bearing H
Check the bearing for damage and unsmooth rotation. Replace if necessary.

Revision: 2010 March TM-91 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004803020

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".


Disassembly INFOID:0000000004803021

For disassembly procedures other than the following items, refer to “SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD” in TM-
44, "Disassembly".
CHECK SHIFT PIN
Set the control bracket to a vise and then remove check shift pin (1)
from control bracket.

JPDIC0507ZZ

STRIKING ROD
1. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-
vice tool] and then remove stopper ring from striking rod.

: Transmission front

JPDIC0511ZZ

2. Remove retaining pin ( ) using a pin punch [Commercial ser-


vice tool] and then remove low/high control lever from striking
rod.

JPDIC0512ZZ

Assembly INFOID:0000000004803022

For assembly procedures other than the following items, refer to “SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD” in TM-52,
"Assembly".
CHECK SHIFT PIN

Revision: 2010 March TM-92 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
1. Set the control bracket to a vise and then install check shift pin
(1) to control bracket. A
2. Tighten check shift pin to the specified torque.

JPDIC0507ZZ

TM
STRIKING ROD
1. Install low/high control lever to striking rod and then install
retaining pin ( ) to low/high control lever using a pin punch
[Commercial service tool]. E
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of low/high control lever F
and striking rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of low/high control lever. G

JPDIC0512ZZ

H
2. Install stopper ring to striking rod and then install retaining pin
( ) to stopper ring using a pin punch [Commercial service tool].
I
: Transmission front

CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin. J
• Be careful with the orientation of stopper ring and striking
rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur- K
JPDIC0511ZZ
face of stopper ring.
Inspection INFOID:0000000004803023
L

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY


Shift Fork and Fork Rod M

Revision: 2010 March TM-93 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• Check the contact surface of each forks, rods, levers, and brackets
for excessive wear, uneven wear, bend, and damage. Replace if
necessary.

SCIA1681E

• Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling
sleeve) is within allowable specification below.

One-side wear specification : Refer to TM-96, "Shift


Fork".
Sliding width of new part : Refer to TM-96, "Shift
Fork".

SMT801D

Revision: 2010 March TM-94 2009 G37 Convertible


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: FS6R31A]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications INFOID:0000000004375558
B

Transmission type FS6R31A


C
Engine type VQ37VHR
Axle type 2WD
Number of speed 6 TM
Shift pattern

F
SCIA0955E

Synchromesh type Warner


G
Gear ratio 1st 3.794
2nd 2.324
3rd 1.624 H
4th 1.271
5th 1.000
6th 0.794 I
Reverse 3.446
Number of teeth Main gear Drive 26
J
1st 37
2nd 34
3rd 33 K
4th 31
6th 31
L
Reverse 42
Counter gear Drive 32
1st 12 M
2nd 18
3rd 25
N
4th 30
6th 48
Reverse 15 O
Reverse idler gear 26
Oil capacity (US pt, Imp pt) Approx. 2.83 (6,5)
P
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
Double cone synchronizer 4th
Triple cone synchronizer 1st, 2nd, and 3rd

Revision: 2010 March TM-95 2009 G37 Convertible


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: FS6R31A]
End Play INFOID:0000000004375559

Unit: mm (in)

Item Standard value


Counter shaft 0 – 0.1 (0 – 0.004)
Main drive gear 0 – 0.1 (0 – 0.004)
Mainshaft 0 – 0.1 (0 – 0.004)

Baulk Ring Clearance INFOID:0000000004375560

Unit: mm (in)

Measurement point Standard value Limit value


4th Clearance between synchronizer cone 0.50 – 0.70 (0.020 – 0.028) 0.3 (0.012)
(Double-cone synchronizer) and inner baulk ring end face “A”
Clearance between outer baulk ring 0.85 – 1.35 (0.033 – 0.053) 0.7 (0.028)
pawl and synchronizer cone “B”

PCIB0249E

1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clearance between synchronizer cone 1st: 0.65 – 1.25 (0.026 – 0.049) 0.3 (0.012)
(Triple-cone synchronizer) and clutch gear end face “A” 2nd: 0.60 – 1.30 (0.024 – 0.051) 0.3 (0.012)
3rd: 0.60 – 1.30 (0.024 – 0.051) 0.3 (0.012)
Clearance between outer baulk ring 0.85 – 1.35 (0.033 – 0.053) 0.7 (0.028)
pawl and synchronizer cone “B”
Clearance between inner baulk ring 1st: 0.80 – 1.2 (0.031 – 0.047) 0.3 (0.012)
and clutch gear end face “C” 2nd: 0.75 – 1.25 (0.030 – 0.049) 0.3 (0.012)
3rd: 0.75 – 1.25 (0.030 – 0.049) 0.3 (0.012)
PCIB0835J

5th and 6th 0.70 – 1.35 (0.028 – 0.053) 0.5 (0.020)


Reverse 0.75 – 1.20 (0.030 – 0.047) 0.5 (0.020)

Shift Fork INFOID:0000000004804398

Unit: mm (in)

Measurement point One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part


1st-2nd 0.2 (0.008) 7.80 – 7.93 (0.3071 – 0.3122)
3rd-4th 0.2 (0.008) 7.80 – 7.93 (0.3071 – 0.3122)
5th-6th 0.2 (0.008) 7.80 – 7.93 (0.3071 – 0.3122)
Reverse 0.2 (0.008) 7.80 – 7.93 (0.3071 – 0.3122)

SMT801D

Revision: 2010 March TM-96 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000004375561
B

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM


1. Refer to TM-98, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (condi- C
tions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in
the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
TM
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".

E
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists. F
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data using CONSULT-III and affix them to the Work
Order Sheet.) G
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-244, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also. H
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4. I
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM J
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-238, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-98, "Question sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus- K
tomer occurs.

L
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle. M
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-238, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-98, "Question sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
N
tomer occurs.

>> GO TO 6. O
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-242, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the P
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2010 March TM-97 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”


Use TM-244, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.

>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.

>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 (DTC is reproduced)>>GO TO 5.
YES-2 (Malfunction symptom is reproduced)>>GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Question sheet INFOID:0000000004375562

DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-
fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.

SEF907L

WORKSHEET SAMPLE

Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage km / Mile

Revision: 2010 March TM-98 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Question Sheet
A
Symptoms † Vehicle does not move († Any position † Particular position )
† No up-shift († 1GR → 2GR † 2GR → 3GR † 3GR → 4GR † 4GR → 5GR † 5GR →
6GR † 6GR → 7GR)
B
† No down-shift († 7GR → 6GR † 6GR → 5GR † 5GR → 4GR † 4GR → 3GR † 3GR →
2GR † 2GR → 1GR)
† Lock-up malfunction
C
† Shift point too high or too low
† Shift shock or slip
† Noise or vibration TM
† No kick down
† No pattern select
E
† Others

Frequency † All the time † Under certain conditions † Sometimes ( times a day) F
Weather conditions † Not affected
Weather † Fine † Clouding † Raining † Snowing † Other ( )
† Temp. [Approx. °C (
G
Temp. † Hot † Warm † Cool † Cold
°F)]
Humidity † High † Middle † Low
H
Transmission conditions † Not affected
† Cold † During warm-up † After warm-up
† Engine speed ( rpm) I
Road conditions † Not affected
† In town † In suburbs † Freeway † Off road (Up / Down)
J
Driving conditions † Not affected
† While cruis-
† At starting † While idling † While engine racing † At racing
ing
K
† While accelerating † While decelerating † While turning (Right / Left)
† Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions L

Revision: 2010 March TM-99 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375563

JSDIA1359GB

*: With paddle shifter


System Description INFOID:0000000004375564

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor (or signal) TCM function Actuator


• Transmission range switch • Line pressure control (TM-103) • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Accelerator pedal position sig- • Shift change control (TM-107) • Direct clutch solenoid valve
nal • Shift pattern control • Front brake solenoid valve
• Closed throttle position signal - ASC (Adaptive shift control) (TM-112) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid
• Wide open throttle position sig- - Manual mode (TM-116) valve
nal • Lock-up control (TM-119) • Low brake solenoid valve
• Engine speed signal ⇒ • Fail-safe control (TM-238) ⇒ • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• A/T fluid temperature sensor • Self-diagnosis (TM-151) • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Output speed sensor • CONSULT-III communication line (TM- • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Vehicle speed signal 151) • 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Manual mode switch signal • CAN communication line (TM-158) • A/T CHECK indicator lamp
• Stop lamp switch signal • Back-up lamp relay
• Side G sensor signal • Starter relay
• Input speed sensor 1, 2

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.

Revision: 2010 March TM-100 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004375565

TM

JSDIA1267GB

L
1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM
Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
M
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator N
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
O
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2 P
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.

Revision: 2010 March TM-101 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

Component Description INFOID:0000000004375566

Name Function
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Transmission range switch TM-161, "Description"
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description"
Input speed sensor 1
TM-164, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-188, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-190, "Description"
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-208, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-205, "Description"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-206, "Description"
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-187, "Description"
2346 brake solenoid valve TM-207, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-183, "Description"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-186, "Description"
Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-191, "Description"
Manual mode switch TM-199, "Description"
Paddle shifter TM-199, "Description"
Starter relay TM-159, "Description"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
Stop lamp switch TM-212, "Description"
ECM EC-25, "System Description"
BCM BCS-4, "System Description"
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-15, "System Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-60, "Description"

Revision: 2010 March TM-102 2009 G37 Convertible


LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375567

TM

JSDIA1345GB

G
System Description INFOID:0000000004375568

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator


Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed I
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Line pressure solenoid valve J
Engine speed signal* Line pressure control ↓
Pressure regulator valve
Accelerator pedal position signal*
ECM
Engine and A/T integrated control signal K
(Engine torque)*
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
L
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres- M
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the N
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
O
Normal Control

Revision: 2010 March TM-103 2009 G37 Convertible


LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.

PCIA0008E

Back-up Control (Engine Brake)


When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.

PCIA0009E

During Shift Change


The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic cor-
responds to engine speed, during engine brake operation.

PCIA0010E

At Low Fluid Temperature

Revision: 2010 March TM-104 2009 G37 Convertible


LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line A
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.

PCIA0011E

TM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005182130

O
JSDIA1267GB

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM


Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts P
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".

Revision: 2010 March TM-105 2009 G37 Convertible


LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

Component Description INFOID:0000000004375570

Name Function
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description"
Input speed sensor 1
TM-164, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-186, "Description"
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator valve
the driving state.
ECM EC-25, "System Description"

Revision: 2010 March TM-106 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375571

TM

JSDIA1346GB
I

System Description INFOID:0000000004375572

J
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator


K
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed • High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
• Direct clutch solenoid
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature valve L
• Input clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal*
• Low brake solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal* • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Shift change control
• Front brake solenoid valve
M
ECM Closed throttle position signal*
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal lenoid valve
(Engine torque)* • Line pressure solenoid N
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal* • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. O

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
P
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes

Revision: 2010 March TM-107 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

PCIA0012E

Shift Change
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram

PCIA0013E

*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Blipping Control
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode.

JSDIA0826GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-108 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• The TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position,
the selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression. A
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• The ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression B

TM

G
JSDIA0815GB

Downshifting by the manual mode


H

JSDIA0817GB M

Revision: 2010 March TM-109 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005182133

JSDIA1267GB

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM


Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.

Revision: 2010 March TM-110 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2 A
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch B
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve C
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve E
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

Component Description INFOID:0000000004375574 F

Name Function G
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description" H
Input speed sensor 1
TM-164, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
I
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-188, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-190, "Description" J
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-208, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-205, "Description"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-206, "Description"
K

Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-187, "Description"


2346 brake solenoid valve TM-207, "Description" L
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-186, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-183, "Description"
ECM EC-25, "System Description" M
BCM BCS-4, "System Description"

Revision: 2010 March TM-111 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL)
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375575

JSDIA1348GB

ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : System Description INFOID:0000000004375576

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator


Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
• High and low reverse
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
valve
Engine speed signal* • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal*
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
ECM Shift pattern control
Closed throttle position signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
lenoid valve
(engine torque)*
• Line pressure solenoid
ABS actuator and electric unit valve
Side G sensor signal*
(control unit) • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
For example.....
• When driving on an up/down slope
ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum

Revision: 2010 March TM-112 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake. A
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
B
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.

TM

JSDIA1362GB

H
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switch- I
ing to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main gate enables to cancel DS mode.
- After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the J
selector lever is shifted to the manual gate. (With paddle shifter)

Revision: 2010 March TM-113 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005182134

JSDIA1267GB

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM


Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.

Revision: 2010 March TM-114 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2 A
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch B
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve C
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve E
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) : Component Description INFOID:0000000004375578 F

Name Function G
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description" H
Input speed sensor 1
TM-164, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
I
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-188, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-190, "Description" J
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-208, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-205, "Description"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-206, "Description"
K

Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-187, "Description"


2346 brake solenoid valve TM-207, "Description" L
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-186, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-183, "Description"
ECM EC-25, "System Description" M
BCM BCS-4, "System Description"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-15, "System Description"
N
MANUAL MODE
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-115 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
MANUAL MODE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375579

JSDIA1360GB

*: With paddle shifter


MANUAL MODE : System Description INFOID:0000000004375580

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator


Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature

Engine speed signal*1


ECM Accelerator pedal position sig- • High and low reverse clutch
nal*1 solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
Manual mode signal*1 • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
Not manual mode signal*1 Shift pattern control • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Manual mode shift up signal*1 • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch sole-
Manual mode shift down sig- noid valve
Unified meter and A/C amp. nal*1 • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
Paddle shifter shift up signal*1,
*2

Paddle shifter shift down sig-


nal*1, *2
*1: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
*2: With paddle shifter

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, not manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual
mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal* and paddle shifter shift down signal* from unified meter

Revision: 2010 March TM-116 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based
on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of A
the driver.
*: With paddle shifter
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
B
TM-238, "Fail-Safe".
• The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. if the TCM
refuses the transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to
“UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side. The unified meter and A/C amp. blinks shift indicator on the combina- C
tion meter and sounds the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this
signal. However, the TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the
following. TM
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR.
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR.
MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005182135 E

JSDIA1267GB
P
1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM
Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".

Revision: 2010 March TM-117 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

MANUAL MODE : Component Description INFOID:0000000004375582

Name Function
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description"
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-188, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-190, "Description"
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-208, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-205, "Description"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-206, "Description"
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-187, "Description"
2346 brake solenoid valve TM-207, "Description"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-186, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-183, "Description"
ECM EC-25, "System Description"
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"

Revision: 2010 March TM-118 2009 G37 Convertible


LOCK-UP CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
LOCK-UP CONTROL
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375583

TM

JSDIA1350GB

G
System Description INFOID:0000000004375584

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator


Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed I
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Torque converter clutch sole-
noid valve
J
Engine speed signal*
Lock-up control ↓
Accelerator pedal position signal* Torque converter clutch con-
ECM trol valve K
Closed throttle position signal*
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
(Engine torque)*
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. L

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
M
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston. N
Lock-up operation condition table
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
O

Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
P
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Control
Lock-up control system diagram

Revision: 2010 March TM-119 2009 G37 Convertible


LOCK-UP CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0847GB

Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR.

Revision: 2010 March TM-120 2009 G37 Convertible


LOCK-UP CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005182138

TM

JSDIA1267GB

L
1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. IPDM E/R 3. ECM
Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts
: Component Parts Location". Location". Location".
M
4. BCM 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Stop lamp switch
Refer to BCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to EC-25, "Component Parts Refer to TM-149, "Component Parts
Location". Location". Location".
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Shift position indicator N
trol unit) (On the combination meter) (On the combination meter)
Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
O
10. Manual mode indicator 11. Yaw rate/side G sensor 12. A/T assembly connector
(On the combination meter) Refer to BRC-11, "Component Parts
Location".
13. Control valve with TCM*1 14. Paddle shifter (shift-down)*2 15. Paddle shifter (shift-up)*2 P
16. Manual mode shift-up switch 17. Manual mode switch 18. Manual mode shift-down switch
19. Shift position switch 20. Selector lever position indicator
A. A/T assembly B. Steering wheel C. A/T shift selector assembly
D. Center console

NOTE:
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.

Revision: 2010 March TM-121 2009 G37 Convertible


LOCK-UP CONTROL
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: With paddle shifter

Component Description INFOID:0000000004375586

Name Function
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
Output speed sensor TM-166, "Description"
Input speed sensor 1
TM-164, "Description"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-162, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-183, "Description"
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
Torque converter clutch control valve
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
ECM EC-25, "System Description"

Revision: 2010 March TM-122 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT MECHANISM
A
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004375587

TM

I
JSDIA0768ZZ

1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch J


4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6. *1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear
Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch K
10.*3
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear L
19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear

22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear
25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear M
28. Rear extension 29. Output shaft
*1: 6 and 22 are one unit.
*2: 9 and 18 are one unit. N
*3: 10 and 19 are one unit.
*4: 15 and 20 are one unit.
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-123 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004375588

JSDIA0877GB

System Description INFOID:0000000004375589

DESCRIPTION

Revision: 2010 March TM-124 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-
sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc A
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
B

TM

L
JSDIA1363GB

POWER TRANSMISSION M
“N” Position

Revision: 2010 March TM-125 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0880GB

Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position

Revision: 2010 March TM-126 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA1277GB

• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not P
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions

Revision: 2010 March TM-127 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0866GB

• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-128 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition — Fixed Input/Output


Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution TM
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
H
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier I
“M1” Position

Revision: 2010 March TM-129 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0867GB

• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.

Revision: 2010 March TM-130 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear A
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
B
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft
C
Under drive planetary gear
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output TM
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier E
Rear planetary gear
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
F

Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution


Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the G
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear


Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear H
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the I
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier

“D2” and “DS2” Positions


J

Revision: 2010 March TM-131 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0868GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-132 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition Fixed — Input/Output


Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
H
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier I
“M2” Position

Revision: 2010 March TM-133 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0869GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-134 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition Fixed — Input/Output


Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
H
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier I
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions

Revision: 2010 March TM-135 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0870GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-136 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition Fixed — Input/Output


Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
H
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier I
“D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions

Revision: 2010 March TM-137 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0871GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-138 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition Fixed — Input/Output


Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
H
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
mid internal gear mid internal gear rear carrier I
“D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions

Revision: 2010 March TM-139 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0872GB

• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-140 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Rear planetary gear
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear A
Condition — input/Output —
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions
rear carrier input shaft rear carrier

Mid planetary gear


Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
C

Condition — Output Input


Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
mid internal gear mid internal gear input shaft

“D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions E

Revision: 2010 March TM-141 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0873GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-142 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
C

Condition — Input/Output Input


Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution TM
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft front carrier

Mid planetary gear E


Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft
G
“D7”, “DS7” and “M7” Positions

Revision: 2010 March TM-143 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0874GB

• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake.


• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters state described below.

Revision: 2010 March TM-144 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear A
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
B
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear


Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
C

Condition — Fixed Input/Output


Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution TM
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
nal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear E


Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution F
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft under drive internal gear
G
Mid planetary gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
H
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft I
“R” Position

Revision: 2010 March TM-145 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA0875GB

• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.

Revision: 2010 March TM-146 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT MECHANISM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear A
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
B
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft
C
Under drive planetary gear
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output TM
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
nal gear front carrier E
Rear planetary gear
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Output Fixed Input
F

Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution


Acceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the G
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear


Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear H
Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Same number of revolution as the I
Number of revolutions Deceleration from mid sun gear —
rear sun gear

Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004375590


J
Refer to TM-123, "Cross-Sectional View".
Component Description INFOID:0000000004375591 K

Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function


L
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear. M
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
N
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse O
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
rotation.
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
tation.
P
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
Oil pump
each lubricating system.

Revision: 2010 March TM-147 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000004375592

• Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while
selector lever is in the “P” position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
- Ignition switch ON
- Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed)
- Selector lever knob button is pressed
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION
When brake pedal is not depressed and selector lever is in “P” position. (Unable to shift selector lever.)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if
the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and
presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located
below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock
plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from
the “P” position for this reason.
However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing
the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
JSDIA0119ZZ

When brake pedal is depressed and selector lever is in “P” position. (Able to shift selector lever.)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and
the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when
the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selec-
tor button (F) is pressed.
The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for
this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P
position.

JSDIA0120ZZ

FORCIBLE RELEASE OF SHIFT LOCK


When an electrical or mechanical malfunction occurs in shift lock system, selector lever shift operation from
the “P” position becomes impossible. When shift lock release button is pressed in this state, stopper is forcibly
pressed into shift lock unit, and then it becomes possible to release shift lock. By this operation, shift operation
becomes possible when a malfunction occurs in shift lock system.
CAUTION:
Never use shift lock release button except when select lever is inoperative when depressing brake
pedal while ignition switch is ON.

Revision: 2010 March TM-148 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004375593

TM

JSDIA1269ZZ
I
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid
4. Slider A 5. A/T shift selector harness connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay*1 9. Stop lamp switch J
10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *2
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room LH C. Brake pedal, upper
K
D. Center console

*1: With ICC


*2: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover. L
Component Description INFOID:0000000004375594

M
Component Function
Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of slid-
Shift lock solenoid
ers A and B. N
Shift lock unit
Lock plate Restricts position pin moving.
Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly.
O
Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation.
Shift lock relay* Turns power supply to shift lock unit according to stop lamp switch ON/OFF condition.
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON. P
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay and shift lock relay
Stop lamp switch
internal contact turns ON. (With ICC)
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit. (Without ICC)
*: With ICC

Revision: 2010 March TM-149 2009 G37 Convertible


ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004375595

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.


The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to EC-
557, "DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the
instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-107, "Diagnosis Description".

Revision: 2010 March TM-150 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000004375596

CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS B

Diagnostic test mode Function


Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. C
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
TM
CAN Diagnostic Support
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
Monitor
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
E
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more prac-
Function Test*
tical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
F
Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS


Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index". G

IGN Counter
The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition
H
switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC.
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition I
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
• Other than CAN malfunction J
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255. K
DATA MONITOR
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option L
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION M
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X N
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X —
CAN communication.
Displays the output shaft revolution calculated
O
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
from the pulse signal of output speed sensor.
Displays the turbine revolution calculated
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X from front sun gear revolution and front carrier P
revolution.
Displays the front sun gear revolution calcu-
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — lated from the pulse signal of input speed sen-
sor 1.
Displays the front carrier gear revolution cal-
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — culated from the pulse signal of input speed
sensor 2.

Revision: 2010 March TM-151 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
communication.
Displays the revolution difference between
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
turbine revolution and engine speed.
Displays the accelerator position estimated
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
value received via CAN communication.
Displays the throttle position received via
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
CAN communication.
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calcu-
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X lated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid tem-
perature sensor.
Displays the ATF temperature estimated val-
ue of torque converter outlet calculated from
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X
the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature
sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid tem-
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
perature sensor.

BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.


Displays the command current from TCM to
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
the line pressure solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
the torque converter clutch solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
the low brake solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
the front brake solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
the high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
the input clutch solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
the direct clutch solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to
2346/B SOL (A) — X
the 2346 brake solenoid.
Monitors the command current from TCM to
L/P SOL MON (A) — — the line pressure solenoid, and displays the
monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to
TCC SOL MON (A) — — the torque converter clutch solenoid, and dis-
plays the monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to
L/B SOL MON (A) — — the low brake solenoid, and displays the mon-
itor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — the front brake solenoid, and displays the
monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — the high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and
displays the monitor value.

Revision: 2010 March TM-152 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitor Item Selection
A
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Monitors the command current from TCM to
I/C SOL MON (A) — — the input clutch solenoid, and displays the
monitor value.
C
Monitors the command current from TCM to
D/C SOL MON (A) — — the direct clutch solenoid, and displays the
monitor value.
TM
Monitors the command current from TCM to
2346/B SOL MON (A) — — the 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the
monitor value.
Displays the gear ratio calculated from turbine E
GEAR RATIO — X
revolution and output revolution.
Displays the engine torque estimated value
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —
received via CAN communication. F
Displays the engine torque estimated value
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — reflected the requested torque of each control
unit received via CAN communication. G
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres-
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — — sure calculation process of shift change con-
trol.
H
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres-
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — — sure calculation process of line pressure con-
trol.
I
Displays the target oil pressure value of
torque converter clutch solenoid valve calcu-
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
lated by the oil pressure calculation process of
lock-up control. J
Displays the target oil pressure value of
torque converter clutch solenoid valve calcu-
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
lated by the oil pressure calculation process of
shift change control.
K
Displays the target oil pressure value of low
2 brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm or psi) — — L
pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil M
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of high
N
and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calcu-
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
lated by the oil pressure calculation process of
shift change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of input O
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
P
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
pressure calculation process of shift change
control.

Revision: 2010 March TM-153 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the gear change data using the shift
SHIFT PATTERN — —
pattern control.
Displays the vehicle speed for control using
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
the control of TCM.
Displays the operation status of transmission
RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X —
range switch 4.
Displays the operation status of transmission
RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) X —
range switch 3.
Displays the operation status of transmission
RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) X —
range switch 2.
Displays the operation status of transmission
RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X —
range switch 1.
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
(up switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(up switch).
Displays whether the selector lever is in any
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
position other than manual shift gate position.
Displays whether the selector lever is in the
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
manual shift gate position.
• Displays the reception status of tow mode
switch signal received via CAN communica-
TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — —
tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.

DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.


• Displays the reception status of 1 position
switch signal received via CAN communica-
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
• Displays the reception status of overdrive
control switch signal received via CAN com-
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
munication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
Displays the reception status of stop lamp
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X — switch signal received via CAN communica-
tion.
• Displays the reception status of POWER
mode signal received via CAN communica-
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X — cancel request signal received via CAN com-
munication.
Displays the reception status of ASCD opera-
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
tion signal received via CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of ABS opera-
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —
tion signal received via CAN communication.

Revision: 2010 March TM-154 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitor Item Selection
A
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Displays the reception status of TCS gear
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X — keep request signal received via CAN com-
munication.
C
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X — shift schedule change demand signal re-
ceived via CAN communication is “cold”.
TM
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X — shift schedule change demand signal re-
ceived via CAN communication is “warm”.
Displays whether the identified malfunction E
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of low
brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction F
point judged by TCM is the related parts of
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
high and low reversed clutch, input clutch or
front brake.
G
Displays whether the identified malfunction
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of in-
put clutch or front brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction H
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of
high and low reversed clutch.
Displays the kickdown condition signal status I
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
received via CAN communication.
Displays the idling status signal status re-
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
ceived via CAN communication. J
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
“coasting” judged by TCM.
Displays the transmission value of shift posi- K
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — — tion signal transmitted via CAN communica-
tion.
Displays the command status from TCM to L
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay.
Displays the transmission status of A/T
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — CHECK indicator lamp signal transmitted via
CAN communication. M
• Displays the transmission status of ATF
temperature signal transmitted via CAN
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
communication. N
• Not mounted but displayed.
Displays the transmission status of manual
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — — mode signal transmitted via CAN communica- O
tion.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the mon-
itor status. P
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
Displays the command status from TCM to
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
anti-interlock solenoid.
Displays the shift positions recognized by
SLCT LVR POSI — X
TCM.

Revision: 2010 March TM-155 2009 G37 Convertible


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the current transmission gear posi-
GEAR — X
tion recognized by TCM.
Displays the target gear position of gear
NEXT GR POSI — — change that is calculated based on the vehicle
speed information and throttle information.
Displays the transmission driving mode rec-
SHIFT MODE — —
ognized by TCM.
Displays whether the identified malfunction
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of di-
rect clutch.
Displays whether the identified malfunction
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of
front brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of
2346 brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — point judged by TCM is the related parts of
2346 brake or direct clutch.

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION

Item Description Check item


Following items for “1GR function ” can be confirmed.
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid
valve
Following items for “2GR function” can be confirmed.
• Front brake solenoid
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Direct clutch solenoid
Following items for “3GR function” can be confirmed. valve
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • High and low reverse
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
Following items for “4GR function” can be confirmed.
valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• 2346 brake solenoid
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
valve
Following items for “5GR function” can be confirmed. • Anti-interlock sole-
5TH GR FNCTN P0735 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) noid valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
Following items for “6GR function” can be confirmed.
• Input speed sensor 1,
6TH GR FNCTN P0729 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
2
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Hydraulic control cir-
Following items for “7GR function” can be confirmed. cuit
7TH GR FNCTN P1734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Harness or connec-
tors
• Torque converter
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. clutch solenoid valve
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Torque converter
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input speed sensor 1,
2
• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit

Revision: 2010 March TM-156 2009 G37 Convertible


U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
Description INFOID:0000000005774660
B
The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005774661 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
When the amount of data trans-
Internal Control Module Soft- mitted from each control unit is E
U0300 Control units other than TCM.
ware Incompatibility smaller than the specified
amount.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F


1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and G
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. I
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
J
YES >> Go to TM-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005774662
K

1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT


Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”. L
Is the number of replaced control units one?
YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT
N
With CONSULT-III
1. Remove one of the replaced control units.
2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. O
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method. P
NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-157 2009 G37 Convertible


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000004375597

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375598

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors
TCM is not transmitting or re-
(CAN communication line is
U1000 CAN communication line ceiving CAN communication
open or shorted.)
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• TCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-158, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375599

Go to LAN-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

Revision: 2010 March TM-158 2009 G37 Convertible


P0615 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0615 STARTER RELAY
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375600

TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position. B


DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375601

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors TM
The starter monitor value is
(Starter relay and TCM circuit
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit OFF when the ignition switch is
is open or shorted.)
ON at the “P” and “N” positions.
• Starter relay circuit
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING F
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
H
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. I
Is “P0615” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-159, "Diagnosis Procedure".
J
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375602

K
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground. L

IPDM E/R connector


Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal M
Ground Selector lever in “P” and
Battery voltage
“N” positions.
E5 30
Selector lever in other N
0V
positions.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-10, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM -". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1) P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle
side harness connector terminal.

Revision: 2010 March TM-159 2009 G37 Convertible


P0615 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
F51 9 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-160 2009 G37 Convertible


P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375603

The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and transmits a signal to the TCM. B
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375604

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors TM
(Transmission range switch-
Transmission range switch sig-
Transmission Range Sensor A es 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
P0705 nals input with impossible pat-
Circuit (PRNDL Input) is open or shorted.)
tern. E
• Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3 and 4

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F


1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
G
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. I
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more) J
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8


K
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST L
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-161, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375605

N
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P

Revision: 2010 March TM-161 2009 G37 Convertible


P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
Description INFOID:0000000004375606

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375607

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40°C (−40°F)
(Sensor circuit is open.)
or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehicle at the
• A/T fluid temperature sen-
vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
sor
• Harness or connectors
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180°C (356°F) (Sensor circuit is short.)
or more for 5 seconds. • A/T fluid temperature sen-
sor
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is in the following
conditions while driving the vehicle at the vehicle
speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
Transmission Fluid Tempera-
P0710 : 15°C – 20°C (59°F – 68°F)
ture Sensor A Circuit
: 10°C – 15°C (50°F – 59°F)
For 4 minutes
: 5°C – 10°C (41°F – 50°F) • Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
: 0°C – 5°C (32°F – 41°F) • A/T fluid temperature sen-
: −5°C – 0°C (23°F – 32°F) sor

: −10°C – −5°C (14°F – 23°F)


For 7 minutes
: −15°C – −10°C (5°F – 14°F)
: −20°C – −15°C (−4°F – 5°F)
For 14 minutes : −40°C – −20°C (−40°F – −4°F)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.

SLCT LVR POSI :D


VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0710” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-163, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Revision: 2010 March TM-162 2009 G37 Convertible


P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
NO >> INSPECTION END
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375608

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT B


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View". C
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

TM

Revision: 2010 March TM-163 2009 G37 Convertible


P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
Description INFOID:0000000004375609

The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375610

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors
The revolution of input speed
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A (Sensor circuit is open.)
P0717 sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or
Circuit No Signal • Input speed sensor 1 and/or
less.
2

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data
Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.

SLCT LVR POSI :D


GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
W/O THL POS : ON
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0717” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-164, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375611

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-164 2009 G37 Convertible


P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A

TM

Revision: 2010 March TM-165 2009 G37 Convertible


P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
Description INFOID:0000000004375612

The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375613

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• The output speed sensor rec-
ognizes that the vehicle
speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or
less even if the vehicle speed
signal recognizes that the ve-
hicle speed is 20 km/h (12
MPH) or more. (Only when
starts after the ignition switch
is turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed recog-
nized by the output speed
sensor decelerates 36 km/h
(23 MPH) or more during 60
msec when the output speed
sensor recognizes that the • Harness or connectors
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit vehicle speed is 36 km/h (23 (Sensor circuit is open.)
MPH) or more and the vehicle • Output speed sensor
speed signal recognizes that
the vehicle speed is 24 km/h
(15 MPH) or more.
• The vehicle speed of output
speed sensor decelerates 36
km/h (23 MPH) or more even
if the vehicle speed of vehicle
speed signal accelerates or
decelerates 24 km/h (15
MPH) or less during 60 msec
when the output speed sen-
sor recognizes that the vehi-
cle speed is 36 km/h (23
MPH) or more.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

Revision: 2010 March TM-166 2009 G37 Convertible


P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0720” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-167, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375614
C
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". TM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E

Revision: 2010 March TM-167 2009 G37 Convertible


P0725 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Description INFOID:0000000004375615

The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375616

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM. Harness or connectors
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • The engine speed is more (ECM to TCM circuit is open or
less 150 rpm even if the vehi- shorted.)
cle speed is more than 10 km/
h (7 MPH).

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

SLCT LVR POSI :D


VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10 km/h (7 MPH)
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0725” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-168, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375617

1.CHECK DTC OF ECM


With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-557, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?

Revision: 2010 March TM-168 2009 G37 Convertible


P0725 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3. A
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
C

TM

Revision: 2010 March TM-169 2009 G37 Convertible


P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004375618

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375619

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
• Low brake solenoid valve
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio • 0.913 or more
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 0.811 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
• “TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.

ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-170 2009 G37 Convertible


P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 6th A
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF B
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” C
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. TM

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 6th E
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC. F
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
G
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
I
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

J
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375620

K
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M

Revision: 2010 March TM-171 2009 G37 Convertible


P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004375621

• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear.


• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375622

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


The revolution of under drive
sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more.
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
NOTE:
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio • Front brake solenoid valve
Not detected when in “P” or “N”
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
position and during a shift to “P”
or “N” position.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
• “TM-172, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.


VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375623

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-172 2009 G37 Convertible


P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375624

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375625 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio • 5.219 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 4.629 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-174, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-173 2009 G37 Convertible


P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 1st
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 1st
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375626

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-174 2009 G37 Convertible


P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375627

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375628 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0732 Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio • 3.385 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 3.003 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-176, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-175 2009 G37 Convertible


P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 2nd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 2nd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375629

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-176 2009 G37 Convertible


P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375630

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375631 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio • 2.165 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 1.921 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-178, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-177 2009 G37 Convertible


P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 3rd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 3rd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375632

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-178 2009 G37 Convertible


P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375633

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375634 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0734 Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio • 1.496 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 1.328 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-180, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-179 2009 G37 Convertible


P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 4th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 4th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375635

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-180 2009 G37 Convertible


P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375636

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375637 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio • 1.060 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 0.940 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-182, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-181 2009 G37 Convertible


P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR : 5th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 5th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-182, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-182, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375638

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-182 2009 G37 Convertible


P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375639

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, B
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator
pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not C
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375640
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


E
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
The torque converter clutch so-
• Harness or connectors
lenoid valve monitor value is 0.4
(Solenoid valve circuit is F
Torque Converter Clutch Cir- A or less when the torque con-
P0740 open or shorted.)
cuit/Open verter clutch solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch sole-
command value is more than
noid valve
0.75 A.
G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. J
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. K
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 30 seconds or more.
NOTE: L
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
M
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
N
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
O
Is “P0740” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-183, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375641

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-183 2009 G37 Convertible


P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-184 2009 G37 Convertible


P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375642

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375643 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
• Torque converter clutch sole- E
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit The lock-up is not performed in noid valve
P0744
Intermittent spite of within the lock-up area. • Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
G
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III J
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
NOTE: K
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
L
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more M
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N
Is “P0744” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-185, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375644

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P

Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-185 2009 G37 Convertible


P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
Description INFOID:0000000004375645

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375646

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


The line pressure solenoid
• Harness or connectors
valve monitor value is 0.4 A or
(Sensor valve circuit is open
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A less when the line pressure so-
or shorted.)
lenoid valve command value is
• Line pressure solenoid valve
more than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0745” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-186, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375647

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-186 2009 G37 Convertible


P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375648

• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake. B
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375649

C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause TM


• The anti-interlock solenoid
valve monitor value is ON
when the anti-interlock sole- E
noid valve command value is • Harness or connectors
OFF. (Solenoid valve circuit is
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• The anti-interlock solenoid open or shorted.)
valve monitor value is OFF • Anti-interlock solenoid valve F
when the anti-interlock sole-
noid valve command value is
ON.
G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I

>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. K
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. L
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
M
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. N
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0750” detected?
O
YES >> Go to TM-187, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375650 P

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-187 2009 G37 Convertible


P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
Description INFOID:0000000004375651

• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375652

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


The input clutch solenoid valve
• Harness or connectors
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
(Solenoid valve circuit is
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B when the input clutch solenoid
open or shorted.)
valve command value is more
• Input clutch solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more


MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0775” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375653

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-188 2009 G37 Convertible


P0780 SHIFT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0780 SHIFT
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375654

The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375655 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• When shifting from 3rd to 4th
with the selector lever in “D” E
position, the gear ratio does
not shift to 1.412 (gear ratio of • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
P0780 Shift Error 4th). • Low brake solenoid valve
• When shifting from 5th to 6th • Hydraulic control circuit F
or 6th to 7th, the engine
speed exceeds the pre-
scribed speed.
G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I

>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. K
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
L
SLCT LVR POSI :D
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
M
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N
Is “P0780” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-189, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375656

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-189 2009 G37 Convertible


P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
Description INFOID:0000000004375657

• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375658

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


The front brake solenoid valve
• Harness or connectors
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
(Solenoid valve circuit is
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C when the front brake solenoid
open or shorted.)
valve command value is more
• Front brake solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more


MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0795” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375659

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-190 2009 G37 Convertible


P1705 TP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375660

• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. B
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM.
• The TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via CAN communication. C

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375661

TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


E
TCM detects the difference be-
Harness or connectors
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- tween two accelerator pedal po-
P1705 (Sensor circuit is open or short-
sor Signal Circuit sition signals received from
ed.) F
ECM via CAN communication.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
H

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. J
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

SLCT LVR POSI :D


K
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1705” detected? L
YES >> Go to TM-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375662

1.CHECK DTC OF ECM


N
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
O
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-557, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2010 March TM-191 2009 G37 Convertible


P1705 TP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-192 2009 G37 Convertible


P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375663

The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM via CAN communication line. B
The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will
then use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375664 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• The vehicle speed signal rec-
ognizes that the vehicle E
speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or
less even if the output speed
sensor recognizes that the
vehicle speed is 20 km/h (12 F
MPH) or more. (Only when
starts after the ignition switch
is turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed recog- G
nized by the vehicle speed
signal decelerates 36 km/h
(23 MPH) or more during 60
msec when the vehicle speed
H
signal recognizes that the ve- Harness or connectors
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit hicle speed is 36 km/h (23 (Sensor circuit is open or short-
MPH) or more and the output ed.)
I
speed sensor recognizes that
the vehicle speed is 24 km/h
(15 MPH) or more.
• The vehicle speed of vehicle J
speed signal decelerates 36
km/h (23 MPH) or more even
if the vehicle speed of output
speed sensor accelerates or K
decelerates 24 km/h (15
MPH) or less during 60 msec
when the vehicle speed sig-
nal recognizes that the vehi- L
cle speed is 36 km/h (23
MPH) or more.
M
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. N
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at O
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.

Revision: 2010 March TM-193 2009 G37 Convertible


P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more


4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P1721” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-194, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375665

1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.


With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-102, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-194 2009 G37 Convertible


P1730 INTERLOCK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375666

Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. B


DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375667

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


• Harness or connectors TM
(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
E
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
The output speed sensor de-
• High and low reverse clutch
tects the deceleration of 12 km/
P1730 Interlock solenoid valve
h (7 MPH) or more for 1 sec-
• Front brake solenoid valve F
ond.
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake G
• Hydraulic control circuit
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not H
a input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: I
• “TM-196, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause J
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING K
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION M
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
N
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.

SLCT LVR POSI :D


GEAR : 1st through 7th O
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. P
Is “P1730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-196, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Judgment of A/T Interlock INFOID:0000000004375668

Refer to TM-238, "Fail-Safe".

Revision: 2010 March TM-195 2009 G37 Convertible


P1730 INTERLOCK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375669

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-196 2009 G37 Convertible


P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375670

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375671 C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


TM
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve E
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
The gear ratio is:
P1734 Gear 7 Incorrect Ratio • 0.818 or more
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• 0.726 or less
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor G
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-198, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. I
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

Revision: 2010 March TM-197 2009 G37 Convertible


P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

GEAR :7
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
242, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position


Gear position : 7th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-198, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-198, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375672

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-198 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375673

• The manual mode switch, manual mode shift-up switch and manual mode shift-down switch are installed in B
the A/T shift selector assembly. It transmits manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to
unified meter and A/C amp. Then unified meter and A/C amp. transmits signals to TCM via CAN communi-
cation.
• Manual mode switch transmits manual mode switch signal or not manual mode switch signal to unified meter C
and A/C amp. Then TCM receives signals from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The manual mode shift-up switch transmits manual mode shift up signal to unified meter and A/C amp. Then
TCM receives signal from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. TM
• The manual mode shift-down switch transmits manual mode shift down signal to unified meter and A/C amp.
Then TCM receives signal from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The paddle shifter transmits shift up and shift down switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. Then TCM
receives signals from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. E
• The TCM transmits manual mode indicator signal to unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
line.
F
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375674

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


G
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
• TCM monitors manual mode, H
(These switches circuit is
non manual mode, up or
open or shorted.)
down switch signal, and de-
• Manual mode switch (Into A/
tects as irregular when im-
T shift selector) I
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit possible input pattern occurs
• Manual mode shift-up switch
2 seconds or more.
(Into A/T shift selector)
• Shift up/down signal of pad-
• Manual mode shift-down
dle shifter continuously re-
mains ON for 60 seconds.*
switch (Into A/T shift selector) J
• Paddle shifter*
*: With paddle shifter

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K

1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. M
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III N
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds.
O
SLCT LVR POSI :D
MANU MODE SW : ON
P
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-200, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2010 March TM-199 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375675

1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT


With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW”* and “SFT DWN ST SW”* in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.

Item Monitor Item Condition Status


Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Manual mode switch
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
SFT UP ST SW
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter*
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Other than the above OFF
*: With paddle shifter

Without CONSULT-III
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
3. *Shift the paddle shifter to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. *Shift the paddle shifter to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
*: With paddle shifter
Which item is abnormal?
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
+ −
1
2
M137 4 Battery voltage
3
5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2010 March TM-200 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-203, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
C
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. TM

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
M137 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1) G
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. H

Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness


A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
connector Continuity
I
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 10
2 25 J
M137 M66 Existed
3 5
5 11
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
M
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal
1 N
Ground
2
M137 Not existed
3
O
5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12. P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Revision: 2010 March TM-201 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector


Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
+ −
M32
3 1 Battery voltage
M39
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 9.
8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-203, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]", TM-204,
"Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M32
1 Existed
M39
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and
A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness


Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M32 26
3 M66 Existed
M39 6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M32
3 Not existed
M39
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.

Revision: 2010 March TM-202 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".


Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
13.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. C
1. Reconnect all the connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW”* and TM
“ST SFT DWN SW”* in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”.
*: With paddle shifter
4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-83, "Reference Value". E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-130, "Exploded View". F

Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004375676

1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH G

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.


H
A/T shift selector connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift
Existed
I
1 gate side
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed J
2
Other than the above Not existed
M137 4
Selector lever is shifted to+ side Existed
3 K
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift
Not existed
5 gate side
L
Other than the above Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END M
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] INFOID:0000000004375677
N
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP)
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals. O
Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
P
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is
Existed
M39 1 3 pulled.
Other than the above Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (shift-up). Refer to TM-263, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-203 2009 G37 Convertible


P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000004375678

1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN)


Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals.

Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector


Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Paddle shifter (shift-down)
Existed
M32 1 3 is pulled.
Other than the above Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (shift-down). Refer to TM-263, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-204 2009 G37 Convertible


P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375679

• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted B
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. C

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375680

TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


E
The high and low reverse clutch
• Harness or connectors
solenoid valve monitor value is
(Solenoid valve circuit is
0.4 A or less when the high and
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D open or shorted.) F
low reverse clutch solenoid
• High and low reverse clutch
valve command value is more
solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION J

With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in K
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
L
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd M
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST N
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2713” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-205, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375681
P
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-205 2009 G37 Convertible


P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
Description INFOID:0000000004375682

• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375683

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


The low brake solenoid valve
• Harness or connectors
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
(Solenoid valve circuit is
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E when the low brake solenoid
open or shorted.)
valve command value is more
• Low brake solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more


MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2722” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-206, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375684

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-206 2009 G37 Convertible


P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375685

• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans- B
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM. C

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375686

TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause


E
The 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Harness or connectors
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
(Solenoid valve circuit is
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F when the 2346 brake solenoid
open or shorted.) F
valve command value is more
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING H
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
J
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”. K
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more L


MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more M
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N
Is “P2731” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-207, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END O

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375687

P
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-207 2009 G37 Convertible


P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
Description INFOID:0000000004375688

• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004375689

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected is... Possible cause


The direct clutch solenoid valve
• Harness or connectors
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
(Solenoid valve circuit is
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G when the direct clutch solenoid
open or shorted.)
valve command value is more
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
than 0.75 A.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more


MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2807” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-208, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375690

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT


Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-208 2009 G37 Convertible


MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375691

Supply power to TCM. B


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375692

1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1) C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. TM

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector


Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal Ground E
F51 2 Always Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2) G
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector H


Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
1 Ground I
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V
F51
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
6
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5. K
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. L

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground M
5
F51 Existed
10
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
O
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connec- P
tor terminal 2. Refer to PG-6, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse (No.36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-95, "Fuse and Fusible Link
Arrangement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-209 2009 G37 Convertible


MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1)


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle
side harness connector terminals.

IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1
E7 58 F51 Existed
6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
1
E51 Not existed
6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-6, "Wiring Diagram - BAT-
TERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse (No.43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-96, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-210 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000004375693

TCM transmit the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. Then manual B
mode switch position is indicated on the shift position indicator.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004375694

C
1.CHECK A/T INDICATOR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TM
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position
indicator mutually coincide. E
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-211, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375695

1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS H


With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. I
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR
POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to TM-226, "Reference Value".
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
J
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-226, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
K
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-203, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". L
• Check A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>Perform “Self M
Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Index".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>Check the N
combination meter. Refer to MWI-4, "Work flow".

Revision: 2010 March TM-211 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description INFOID:0000000004375696

Refer to TM-148, "System Description".


Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004375697

JCDWA0495GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-212 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JCDWA0496GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-213 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JCDWA0497GB

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004375698

1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?

Revision: 2010 March TM-214 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> Go to TM-215, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
B
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-215, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375699

1.VEHICLE EQUIPMENT INSPECTION TM

Is the vehicle equipped with ICC?


E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. G
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal H
Ground
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
E52 2
Released brake pedal. 0V
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 12.
J
3.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector L


Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
M137 8 M
Released brake pedal. 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9. N
NO >> GO TO 25.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1)
O
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector


Continuity P
Connector Terminal Ground
E52 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Revision: 2010 March TM-215 2009 G37 Convertible
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-221, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 3)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector


Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal Ground
E52 5 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 22.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.

Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E52 3 M137 8 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E52 3 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side
harness connector terminals.

Revision: 2010 March TM-216 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side harness connec- A


A/T shift selector connector
tor Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
8 3 B
M137 M222 Existed
4 4
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID TM
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-220, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair shift lock unit. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
12.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 4) F
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
G
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal Ground
H
E110 3 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 17. I
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
J
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
K
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 8F E110 3 Existed
L

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 14. M
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. N

Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground O
E103 8F Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
P
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-6, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY
POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery

Revision: 2010 March TM-217 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• 10A fuse [No.7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-94, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrange-
ment".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
16.CHECK DTC OF ICC
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ICC”.
Is any malfunction detected?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-114, "DTC Index".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
17.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-221, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 (With ICC)>>GO TO 20.
YES-2 (Without ICC)>>GO TO 28.
NO >> GO TO 18.
18.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".

>> GO TO 19.
19.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-221, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View".
20.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehi-
cle side harness connector terminal.

Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 E52 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
21.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E110 4 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
22.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.

Revision: 2010 March TM-218 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay
vehicle side harness connector terminal. A

Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
E103 4F E52 5 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 23.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
23.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2) TM
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E103 4F Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
24.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-6, "Wiring Diagram - H
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-94, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrange-
ment". I
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
25.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 5) K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
L
4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector


Voltage (Approx.) M
Connector Terminal Ground
E110 1 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> GO TO 26.
26.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 3) O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch P
vehicle side harness connector terminal.

Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 4F E110 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2010 March TM-219 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
27.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 4)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E103 4F Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
28.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.

Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 2 M137 8 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 29.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
29.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E110 2 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000004375700

1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID


Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is acti-
vated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

Shift lock unit connector


Terminal Condition Status
Connector
+ (fuse) −
Apply 12 V direct current
Shift lock solenoid oper-
M222 3 4 between terminals 3 and
ates
4.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-220 2009 G37 Convertible


SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000004375701

A
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals.
CAUTION: B
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

Shift lock relay connector C


Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 1 and Existed TM
E52 3 5 2.
OFF Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.
F
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000004375702

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH G


Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.

Stop lamp switch connector H


Vehicle type Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
With ICC 1 2 I
Released brake pedal. Not existed
E110
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
Without ICC 3 4
Released brake pedal. Not existed J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". K

Revision: 2010 March TM-221 2009 G37 Convertible


SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Description INFOID:0000000004375703

Indicates selector lever position.


Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004375704

1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1)


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-222, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2)
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting
switch in 1st position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-222, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004375705

1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


Which item is abnormal?
Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 9.
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 10 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
Revision: 2010 March TM-222 2009 G37 Convertible
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator side connector of shift position switch.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and selector lever position indicator side A
connector terminals of shift position switch.

Selector lever position indicator side con-


A/T shift selector connector B
nector of shift position switch Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
7 Selector lever in “D” Existed C
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
4
9 Selector lever in “M” Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 position. Not existed TM
2, 6 Selector lever in “N” Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 and “M” position. Not existed
M137 M221 E
3, 6 Selector lever in “D” Existed
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
10
4, 6 Selector lever in “R” Existed F
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
5, 6 Selector lever in “P” Existed
G
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. H
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
I
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-224, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indi-
cator)".
Is the inspection result normal?
J
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1) K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle L
side harness connector terminal.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity M
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2) O

Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 10 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2010 March TM-223 2009 G37 Convertible


SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

8.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL


Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-45, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.

A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector


Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
+ −
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-36, "Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -".
10.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator side connector of shift position switch.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and selector lever position indicator side
connector terminals of shift position switch.

Selector lever position indicator side connector of


A/T shift selector connector
shift position switch Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
10 Existed
7
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 Not existed
M137 M221
11 Existed
9
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000004375706

1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR


Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

Revision: 2010 March TM-224 2009 G37 Convertible


SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Selector lever position indicator connector A


Terminal Condition Status
Connector
+ (fuse) −
Apply 12 V direct current be- “N” position indicator lamp
B
2
tween terminals 2 and 7. turns on.
Apply 12 V direct current be- “D” position indicator lamp
3 C
tween terminals 3 and 7. turns on.
7
Apply 12 V direct current be- “R” position indicator lamp
4
tween terminals 4 and 7. turns on.
M221
Apply 12 V direct current be- “P” position indicator lamp TM
5
tween terminals 5 and 7. turns on.
Apply 12 V direct current be- “M” mode indicator lamp
6 9
tween terminals 6 and 9. turns on. E
Apply 12 V direct current be-
10 11 Illumination lamp turns on.
tween terminals 10 and 11.
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
G

Revision: 2010 March TM-225 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004375707

VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL


NOTE:
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts in accordance with the specified diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (that implies gear position) on CONSULT-III may slightly differ from that is described in Ser-
vice Manual. This occurs because of the reasons as per the following:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule in Service Manual refers to the point where shifting starts
- Gear position on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifting completes
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Approximately equals the speed-
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
ometer reading.
Approximately equals the speed-
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
ometer reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio
Approximately equals the engine
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
Revolution of front sun gear is indi-
F SUN GR REV During driving
cated.
Revolution of front carrier is indi-
F CARR GR REV During driving
cated.
Closely equals the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Turbine revolution
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON
indicated.
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
TCC SOLENOID Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0A
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
L/B SOLENOID
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A

Revision: 2010 March TM-226 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A B
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A C
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
TM
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346/B SOL
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A E
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
TCC SOL MON Lock-up is active 0.8 A
F
Other than the above 0A
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
L/B SOL MON
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A G
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
FR/B SOL MON
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
H
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL MON
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A I
I/C SOL MON
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
D/C SOL MON J
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346/B SOL MON
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
K
Driving with 1GR 4.924
Driving with 2GR 3.194
Driving with 3GR 2.043 L
GEAR RATIO Driving with 4GR 1.412
Driving with 5GR 1.000
M
Driving with 6GR 0.862
Driving with 7GR 0.772
Changes the value according to N
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Changes the value according to
ENG TORQUE D During driving
the acceleration or deceleration. O
Changes the value according to
INPUT TRQ S During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Changes the value according to P
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
TRGT PRES L/P
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa

Revision: 2010 March TM-227 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Low brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake is disengaged 0 kPa
Front brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake is disengaged 0 kPa
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 kPa
Input clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch is engaged 0 kPa
Direct clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch is engaged 0 kPa
2346 brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake is disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
Approximately equals the speed-
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
ometer reading.
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF
RANGE SW 4
Other than the above ON
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF
RANGE SW 3
Other than the above ON
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF
RANGE SW 2
Other than the above ON
Selector lever in “P” position OFF
RANGE SW 1
Other than the above ON
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled. ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled. ON
SFT UP ST SW
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Tow mode ON
TOW MODE SW*
Other than the above OFF
Driving with DS mode ON
DS RANGE
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “1” position ON
1 POSITION SW*
Other than the above OFF
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
OD CONT SW*
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
Brake pedal is depressed ON
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released OFF

Revision: 2010 March TM-228 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
Power mode ON
POWERSHIFT SW*
Other than the above OFF
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON B
ASCD-OD CUT
Other than the above OFF
ASCD operate ON
ASCD-CRUISE
Other than the above OFF C
ABS operate ON
ABS SIGNAL
Other than the above OFF
TM
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
TCS GR/P KEEP
Other than the above OFF
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change E
ON
TCS SIGNAL 2 demand signal is “cold”
Other than the above OFF
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change F
ON
TCS SIGNAL 1 demand signal is “warm”
Other than the above OFF
At 4 - 5 - 6 gear shift control FAIL
G
LOW/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 1 - 2 - 3 gear shift control FAIL H
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 4 - 5 - 6 gear shift control FAIL
IC/FRB PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL I
At 4 - 5 - 6 gear shift control FAIL
HLR/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
J
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed ON
W/O THL POS
Accelerator pedal is released OFF
Accelerator pedal is released ON K
CLSD THL POS
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed OFF
Accelerator pedal is depressed DRIVE
DRV CST JUDGE L
Accelerator pedal is released COAST

Revision: 2010 March TM-229 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
When the selector lever is positioned in between each po-
OFF
sition.
Selector lever in “P” position P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4

SHIFT IND SIGNAL Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3


Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7
Driving with DS mode DS
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
STARTER RELAY
Other than the above OFF
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
F-SAFE IND/L
Other than the above OFF
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
ATF WARN LAMP*
Other than the above OFF
Driving with manual mode ON
MANU MODE IND
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL MON Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
START RLY MON
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF

Revision: 2010 March TM-230 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions B
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5 C
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3
TM
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th E
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
SHIFT MODE F
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
D/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL G
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
FR/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
H
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
2346/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL I
2346B/DC PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
*: Not mounted but always display as OFF
J
TERMINAL LAYOUT

SCIA1658E

PHYSICAL VALUES N

Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.) O
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output

1 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage P


Ground Power supply Input
(Y) Ignition switch OFF 0V
2 Power supply
Ground Input Always Battery voltage
(R) (Memory back-up)
3 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output

Revision: 2010 March TM-231 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output
4 Input/
— K-line — —
(V) Output
5
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)

6 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage


Ground Power supply Input
(Y) Ignition switch OFF 0V
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
7
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON Selector lever in other than
(R) Battery voltage
above.
8 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
Selector lever in “N” and “P” po-
Battery voltage
9 sitions.
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
(GR) Selector lever in other than
0V
above.
10
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)

Revision: 2010 March TM-232 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004375708

TM

P
JCDWA0489GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-233 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JCDWA0490GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-234 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JCDWA0491GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-235 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JCDWA0492GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-236 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JCDWA0493GB

Revision: 2010 March TM-237 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JCDWA0494GB

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000004375709

TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st Fail-Safe, 2nd
Fail-Safe and Final Fail-Safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.

Revision: 2010 March TM-238 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-97, "Diagnosis
Flow". A

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd Fail-Safe early. It shifts to 2nd Fail-Safe or Final Fail-Safe after the vehicle stopped.
B
The mode that the vehicle shifts to Final Fail-Safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunc-
2nd fail-safe
tioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st and 2nd Fail-Safe are not used, and
C
Final fail-safe then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION TM

Vehicle
DTC Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
condition
E
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position (The • Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed) shifting can be performed) F
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears • The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per- of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per- G
formed formed
P0705 — —
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF H
• Starter relay is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled) (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock I
Between • The shifting between the gears
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed —
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears J
P0710 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
• Fix the gear while driving
the gears of —
• Manual mode is prohibited
4-5-6-7 K
Between • The shifting between the gears
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed —
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears
P0717 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed L
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
• Fix the gear while driving
the gears of —
• Manual mode is prohibited
4-5-6-7
M
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
Between
• Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of —
• Treat the vehicle speed that the N
1-2-3
vehicle speed signal receives as • The shifting between the gears
P0720 positive of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
Between • Manual mode is prohibited O
the gears of • Treat the vehicle speed that the —
4-5-6-7 vehicle speed signal receives as
positive
P

Revision: 2010 March TM-239 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle
DTC Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
condition
• Locks in 1GR
Neutral • The shifting between the gears
malfunction of 1 - 2 can be performed
• Locks in 4GR
between • The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited —
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
1 - 2 - 3 and • The shifting between the gears
7 of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
P0729 • Manual mode is prohibited
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 • The shifting between the gears
• Driving with the gear ratio be-
P0734 of 1 - 2 can be performed
tween 1GR and 2GR
P0735 • The shifting between the gears
• Driving with the gear ratio be-
P1734 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
tween 2GR and 3GR • The shifting between the gears
Other than • The shifting between the gears
• Locks in 3GR of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
the above of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
• Fix the gear while driving
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
• Neutral
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
• The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 can be performed
P0730 — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral • The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0744 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
P0750 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
P0775 • The shifting between the gears
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
P2713 — 6GR or 7GR — • The shifting between the gears
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
P2731 • The shifting between the gears
P2807 of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0780 — — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped-
al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited is released is prohibited is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
• Neutral • The shifting between the gears
P1730 — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited of 3 - 4 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

Revision: 2010 March TM-240 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle
DTC Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
condition A
Paddle
switch mal- Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
function B
Gate switch
P1815 Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
malfunction
Malfunction C
of both Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
switches
Between • The shifting between the gears TM
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed — • The shifting between the gears
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
U0300
• Line pressure is set to the maxi-
U1000 Between
• Fix the gear at driving mum hydraulic pressure
the gears of — E
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
4-5-6-7
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR F
P1721

Protection Control INFOID:0000000004375710


G
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control. H
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. I

Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more


Control at malfunction Neutral J
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
Normal return condition and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less K
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
L
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR. M

• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and N
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction O
Vehicle behavior Does not exist

TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL P


Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.

Revision: 2010 March TM-241 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TCM electronic substrate temperature


• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Normal return condition and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004375711

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the
following list.

Priority Detected items (DTC)


1 • U1000 CAN communication line
• P0615 Starter relay
• P0705 Transmission range switch A
• P0710 Transmission fluid temperature sensor A
• P0717 Input speed sensor A
• P0720 Output speed sensor
• P0740 Torque converter
• P0745 Pressure control solenoid A
2
• P0750 Shift solenoid A
• P0775 Pressure control solenoid B
• P0795 Pressure control solenoid C
• P2713 Pressure control solenoid D
• P2722 Pressure control solenoid E
• P2731 Pressure control solenoid F
• P2807 Pressure control solenoid G
• P0729 6GR incorrect ratio
• P0730 Incorrect gear ratio
• P0731 1GR incorrect ratio
• P0732 2GR incorrect ratio
• P0733 3GR incorrect ratio
3 • P0734 4GR incorrect ratio
• P0735 5GR incorrect ratio
• P0744 Torque converter
• P0780 Shift
• P1730 Interlock
• P1734 7GR incorrect ratio
• U0300 CAN communication data
• P0725 Engine speed
4 • P1705 TP sensor
• P1721 Vehicle speed signal
• P1815 M-mode switch

DTC Index INFOID:0000000004375712

NOTE:
• If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per
the following list. Refer to TM-242, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-151, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)".

Revision: 2010 March TM-242 2009 G37 Convertible


TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

DTC*2 A
Items
Reference
(CONSULT-III screen terms) MIL*1,
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-III only
CONSULT-III or GST “TRANSMISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-159
B

T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-161


FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-162
C
INPUT SPEED SENSOR P0717 P0717 TM-164
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-166
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-168 TM
6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-170
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-172
E
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-173
2 GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-175
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-177 F
4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-179
5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-181
G
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-183
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-185
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-186 H
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-187
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-188
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-189
I

PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-190


TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-191 J
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-193
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-195
7 GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-197 K
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-199
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-205
L
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-206
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-207
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-208 M
CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-157
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-158
N
*1: Refer to TM-150, "Diagnosis Description".
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision: 2010 March TM-243 2009 G37 Convertible


SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004375713

The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
CAUTION:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01A transmission, replace the A/T assembly.

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve


Accelerator pedal position sensor

Torque converter solenoid valve


Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor

Anti-interlock solenoid valve


Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Front brake solenoid valve

Input clutch solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve


Low brake solenoid valve
Engine speed sensor
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal

CAN communication
Input speed sensor
Symptom

Control linkage
TM-259
TM-166
TM-193
TM-191
TM-168
TM-164
TM-162
TM-161
TM-186
TM-183
TM-206
TM-190
TM-205
TM-188
TM-208
TM-207
TM-187
TM-158
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
→ “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5
→ “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
Driving When 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
perfor- Large shift-
mance 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
shock ing
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
perfor-
mance Downshift when accel-
erator pedal is de- 2 1 4 2 2 3
pressed
Upshift when acceler-
2 1 4 2 2 3
ator pedal is released
Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
Strange noise
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1

Revision: 2010 March TM-244 2009 G37 Convertible


ble
Func-
tion trou-
Gear

change
does no

Revision: 2010 March


tion
tion
“D” posi-

“M” posi-
Symptom
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 7GR
5GR → 6GR
4GR → 5GR
3GR → 4GR
2GR → 3GR
1GR → 2GR

6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
Locks in 5GR
Locks in 1GR

Does not lock-up


1 TM-166 Output speed sensor

2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
TM-168 Engine speed sensor

1
TM-164 Input speed sensor

2
2
2
2
2
2
1

TM-245
TM-162 A/T fluid temperature sensor

2
2
2
2
2
2
1

1
1

3
TM-209 Battery voltage
SYSTEM SYMPTOM

2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-161 Transmission range switch

4
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
TM-199 Manual mode switch
TM-221 Stop lamp switch

2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-186 Line pressure solenoid valve

2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-183 Torque converter solenoid valve

2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-206 Low brake solenoid valve

1
1
1
1
Diagnostic item

2
2
2
2
2
2
1

TM-190 Front brake solenoid valve

1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-205 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1

1
1

TM-188 Input clutch solenoid valve


1

2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1

TM-208 Direct clutch solenoid valve

2
2
2
2
2
2
1

TM-207 2346 brake solenoid valve


1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
1

TM-187 Anti-interlock solenoid valve


1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1

TM-158 CAN communication


[7AT: RE7R01A]

2009 G37 Convertible


I

L
F

P
K
E
B
A

N
H
C

O
G

M
TM
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve


Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor

Anti-interlock solenoid valve


Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Input clutch solenoid valve


Front brake solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve


Low brake solenoid valve
Engine speed sensor
Output speed sensor

Manual mode switch

CAN communication
Input speed sensor
Symptom

Control linkage
TM-259
TM-166
TM-168
TM-164
TM-162
TM-161
TM-199
TM-186
TM-183
TM-206
TM-190
TM-205
TM-188
TM-208
TM-207
TM-187
TM-158
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2

When shift- 3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2


Slip
ing gears 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
Poor
“D” position → “M” position 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 3
shifting
7GR → 6GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
En-
6GR → 5GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
gine
brake 5GR → 4GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
does “M” position
4GR → 3GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3
not
work 3GR → 2GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3

Func- 2GR → 1GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3


tion trou- With selector lever in
ble “D” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
tion is extremely poor.
With selector lever in
“R” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
tion is extremely poor.
While starting off by
Poor
accelerating in 1GR, 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
power
engine races.
trans- Slip
mis- While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
sion 2GR, engine races.
While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
3GR, engine races.
While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
4GR, engine races.
While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
5GR, engine races.

Revision: 2010 March TM-246 2009 G37 Convertible


ble
Func-
tion trou-

sion
mis-
Poor

trans-
power

Revision: 2010 March


Slip
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Symptom

creep.
Lock-up
No creep at all.
Extremely large
7GR, engine races.
6GR, engine races.
While accelerating in
While accelerating in

TM-259 Control linkage

TM-247
3
3
3

TM-166 Output speed sensor

1
3
3
3

TM-168 Engine speed sensor


SYSTEM SYMPTOM

3
3
3

TM-164 Input speed sensor


4
4
4

TM-162 A/T fluid temperature sensor


TM-161 Transmission range switch
TM-199 Manual mode switch
1
1
1
1

TM-186 Line pressure solenoid valve


1
1

TM-183 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve


1

TM-206 Low brake solenoid valve


Diagnostic item

1
1

TM-190 Front brake solenoid valve


1
1
1

TM-205 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve


1
1
1

TM-188 Input clutch solenoid valve


1

TM-208 Direct clutch solenoid valve


1
1

TM-207 2346 brake solenoid valve


1
1
1

TM-187 Anti-interlock solenoid valve


2
2
2

TM-158 CAN communication


[7AT: RE7R01A]

2009 G37 Convertible


I

L
F

P
K
E
B
A

N
H
C

O
G

M
TM
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve


Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor

Line pressure solenoid valve

Anti-interlock solenoid valve


Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Input clutch solenoid valve


Front brake solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve


Low brake solenoid valve
Engine speed sensor
Output speed sensor
Symptom

Stop lamp switch


Control linkage

Battery voltage

Starter relay
TM-259
TM-166
TM-191
TM-168
TM-209
TM-161
TM-221
TM-186
TM-183
TM-206
TM-190
TM-205
TM-188
TM-208
TM-207
TM-187
TM-159
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “D” posi-
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
tion.
Driving is not possible in “R” posi-
3 2 1 1 1
tion.
Power transmis-
Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1
sion cannot be
performed Engine stalls when selector lever
3 4 4 2 1
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
3 1 2 1
position.
Function
Engine starts in position other than
trouble 3 2 1
“N” or “P”.
Vehicle does not enter parking con-
1 2
dition.
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Poor operation Vehicle moves forward with the “R”
1 2
position.
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Vehicle moves backward with the
1 2
“D” position.

Revision: 2010 March TM-248 2009 G37 Convertible


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004375714

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000004889971

K
Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-
ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the
window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic
L
window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000004375715

M
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the A/T assembly connector. Because battery voltage is
applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. N

P
SEF289H

Revision: 2010 March TM-249 2009 G37 Convertible


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids
and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
SEF217U
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to TM-
250, "Service Notice or Precaution".
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-252, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehi-
cle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selec-
tor lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction which results in the damage of parts.
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000004375716

ATF COOLER SERVICE


If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to TM-255,
"Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2010 March TM-250 2009 G37 Convertible


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004375717
B

Tool number
Description C
Tool name
1. 315268E000* A/T fluid changing and adjustment
O-ring
2. 310811EA5A* TM
Charging pipe

E
JSDIA1332ZZ

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts


F

PBIC0190E
H
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Revision: 2010 March TM-251 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000004375718

ATF : Refer to TM-273, "General Specification".


Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-273, "General Specification".
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).

JSDIA1334ZZ

2. Step 2
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION: JSDIA1335ZZ

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from


the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step

Revision: 2010 March TM-252 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle. A
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-264,
"Exploded View". B
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. C
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand. TM
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the E
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe, F
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION: JSDIA1335ZZ

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from


the oil pan. G
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine.
H
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III. I
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
J
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
264, "Exploded View". K
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
L
Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375719

ATF : Refer to TM-273, "General Specification". M


Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-273, "General Specification".
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. N
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-
ranty. O
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
P

Revision: 2010 March TM-253 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine.
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT-III.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec- JSDIA1334ZZ
tor lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 US qt, 1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
JSDIA1335ZZ
13. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-264, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.

Revision: 2010 March TM-254 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID COOLER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T FLUID COOLER
A
Cleaning INFOID:0000000004375720

Whenever an A/T is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. B
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either case, mal-
function of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler C
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CLEANING PROCEDURE
TM
1. Position an oil pan under the A/T inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses E
from the steel cooler tubes or by-pass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting. F
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the
oil pan.
G

JPDIA0711GB H

5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission


Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out- I
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner. J
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin. K
• Never breathe vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- JPDIA0712GB
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet L
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet M
hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any N
remaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T O
fluid cooler steel lines to the A/T.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. JPDIA0713GB

13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T P
by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform “DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.

Revision: 2010 March TM-255 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID COOLER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the A/T inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Never breathe vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- JPDIA0712GB
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.

JPDIA0714GB

6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF into
the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform “INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.

JPDIA0715GB

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.

SCIA2967E

Revision: 2010 March TM-256 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T FLUID COOLER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in A
the coffee filter, the A/T fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T
fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection proce-
dure is ended. Refer to CO-12, "Exploded View".
B

SCIA7031E

TM
Inspection INFOID:0000000004375721

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E

Revision: 2010 March TM-257 2009 G37 Convertible


STALL TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000004375722

INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.

Stall speed : Refer to TM-274, "Stall Speed".


7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST

Selector lever position


Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
• Low brake
H O • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
• Reverse brake
Stall speed O H • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage

Revision: 2010 March TM-258 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T POSITION
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T POSITION
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375723

INSPECTION B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. C
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown TM
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly is shown in the figure. E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking. F
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps does
not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position G
in the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” JSDIA0790GB
H
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
I
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in J
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
K
1. Loosen nut ( ).
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” posi- L
tion direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-260,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lower M
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of N
9.8 N (approximately 1 kg, 2.2 lb). JSDIA0906ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-259 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375725

JSDIA1273GB

1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Console finisher


4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Insert finisher 6. Dust cover plate
7. Dust cover 8. Snap pin 9. Washer
10. Collar 11. Control rod 12. Pivot pin
13. Insulator 14. Shift lock unit 15. A/T shift selector assembly
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375726

REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly.
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.

Revision: 2010 March TM-260 2009 G37 Convertible


A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.
5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2). A
6. Remove selector lever knob.
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Exploded
View". B
CAUTION:
When disconnecting selector lever position indicator con-
nector from shift position switch, never twist or apply an C
excessive load to the connector.
8. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector and harness clips. JPDIA0002ZZ
9. Move passenger’s seat to the end. TM
10. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
11. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
12. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it right- E
ward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
13. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from
A/T shift selector assembly. F
14. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
15. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate. G
16. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.

JPDIA0055ZZ
H

17. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly.
1. Remove cigarette lighter connector (A) from the console fin- I
isher assembly.

: Screw J
2. Remove insert finisher (1) from console finisher assembly.
3. Remove selector lever position indicator.
K

JPDIA0050ZZ
L

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin.
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically. N
• Refer to the followings when installing the selector lever knob to the A/T shift selector assembly.
1. Install the lock pin to the selector lever knob.
2. Insert the shift lever knob into the shift lever until it clicks.
CAUTION: O
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it.
• Never press selector button.
P
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375727

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


Check A/T positions. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T positions. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".

Revision: 2010 March TM-261 2009 G37 Convertible


CONTROL ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
CONTROL ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375731

JSDIA1002GB

1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer


4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator
7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375732

REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
4. Remove control rod from manual lever.
5. Remove insulator and collar from manual lever.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the con-
trol rod.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375733

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


Check A/T positions. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T positions. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".

Revision: 2010 March TM-262 2009 G37 Convertible


PADDLE SHIFTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
PADDLE SHIFTER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375734

TM

I
JPDIA0051GB

1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up) J


Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375735


K

REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-12, "Exploded View". L
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter.
3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly. M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
N

Revision: 2010 March TM-263 2009 G37 Convertible


OIL PAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
OIL PAN
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375736

JPDIA0853GB

1. A/T 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan


4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375737

REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).

: Vehicle front
: Bolt

4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).


5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-270,
"Exploded View".

SCIA8269E

Revision: 2010 March TM-264 2009 G37 Convertible


OIL PAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
6. Remove clips (1).
A
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
B
7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
8. Remove magnets from oil pan.
C

JSDIA0793ZZ

TM
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the mag- E
net, and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan. F
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gas-
ket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling. G
• Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them. H

: Vehicle front
I

J
JSDIA0794ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375738


K

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL


Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal- L
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can M
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-255, "Cleaning". N

SCIA5199E O
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check A/T fluid leakage.
P
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-253, "Adjustment".

Revision: 2010 March TM-265 2009 G37 Convertible


AIR BREATHER HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375739

JSDIA1112ZZ

1. Bracket 2. A/T assembly 3. Air breather tube


4. Clip 5. Air breather hose 6. Air breather box
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-270, "Removal and Installation".

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375740

REMOVAL
1. Remove clips of air breather hose from brackets.
2. Remove air breather box from bracket.
3. Remove air breather box from air breather hose.
4. Remove air breather hose.
5. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-14, "Exploded View".
6. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
7. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
8. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM-68, "Exploded View".
9. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine with a power tool.
10. Remove bracket.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the
hose.
• When inserting air breather hose to air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches
the radius curve end.
• When inserting air breather hose to air breather box, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
stop.
• Install air breather hose to air breather box so that the paint mark is facing backward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing air breather hose to brackets.

Revision: 2010 March TM-266 2009 G37 Convertible


FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375743

TM

I
JPDIA0856GB

1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube J


4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket
7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose B 9. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator K
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375744


L

REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View". M
2. Remove the engine lower cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-29, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B.
4. Remove the exhaust mounting bracket with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". N
5. Remove the A/T fluid cooler tube mounting bolts and bracket.
6. Remove the band fixing two A/T fluid cooler tubes.
7. Remove the stabilizer clamp from the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-16, "Exploded View". O
8. Remove the lower mounting nuts for the engine mounting insulators (RH and LH). Refer to EM-68,
"Exploded View".
P
9. Set a jack under the engine to lift it to the position where the A/T fluid cooler tube can be removed.
CAUTION:
• Never set a jack on the engine oil pan.
• Never pull the harnesses, hoses, etc. excessively.
10. Remove the A/T fluid cooler tubes one at a time from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.

Revision: 2010 March TM-267 2009 G37 Convertible


FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
11. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube holes.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washers.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses.

Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*


Radiator assembly side Facing backward A
A/T fluid cooler hose A
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
Radiator assembly side Facing downward C
A/T fluid cooler hose B
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.

D : Vehicle front
E : Vehicle upper

- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.

JPDIA0965ZZ

- Insert A/T fluid cooler hoses according to dimension “L” described below.

(1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L”


Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end.
A/T fluid cooler hose A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
(D).]
Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler hose B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
(D).]

JSDIA0882ZZ

Revision: 2010 March TM-268 2009 G37 Convertible


FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension “A” from the hose edge. A

Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)


- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. B

SCIA8123E

TM
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375745

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E


Check A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-253, "Adjustment". F

Revision: 2010 March TM-269 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004375749

JPDIA0850GB

1. A/T assembly 2. Bracket 3. Bracket


4. Bracket 5. Bracket
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-270, "Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004375750

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-260, "Exploded View".
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-14, "Exploded View".
5. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-262, "Exploded View".
6. Remove engine lower cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-29, "Exploded View".
7. Remove suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded View".
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-111, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.

Revision: 2010 March TM-270 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-16, "Exploded View". A
10. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View".
11. Turn crankshaft, and remove the tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION: B
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
12. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-267, "Exploded View".
13. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. C
14. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug when setting the trans- TM
mission jack.
NOTE:
Be placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front suspension member, the removal of A/T E
assembly from engine becomes easier.
15. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with a power tool. Refer to
EM-68, "Exploded View".
F
16. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
17. Remove harness and brackets.
18. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with a power tool. G
19. Remove air breather hose, air breather box and bracket. Refer to TM-266, "Exploded View".
20. Remove A/T assembly from the engine.
CAUTION: H
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
21. Remove dynamic damper. Refer to EM-68, "Exploded View". I

SCIA0499E

K
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check fitting of dowel pins ( ). L

JPDIA0900ZZ
O

Revision: 2010 March TM-271 2009 G37 Convertible


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check
dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.

B : Scale
C : Straightedge

Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-274, "Torque Convert-


er".

JPDIA0042ZZ

• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts
in accordance with the following standard.

Bolt symbol A B
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine Engine to A/T assembly
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) JPDIA0979ZZ

*: Tightening the bolt with bracket.


• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM-49, "Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
converter is installed to drive plate.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004375751

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION


• Check A/T fluid leakage.
• Check A/T position. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-253, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-259, "Inspection and Adjustment".

Revision: 2010 March TM-272 2009 G37 Convertible


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000004375755
B

Transmission model code number 1XJ2D


C
Stall torque ratio 1.92 : 1
1st 4.924
2nd 3.194 TM
3rd 2.043
4th 1.412
Transmission gear ratio E
5th 1.000
6th 0.862
7th 0.772 F
Reverse 3.972
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
G
Fluid capacity 9.2 liter (9-3/4 US qt, 8-1/8 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
H
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
*2: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
I

Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004375756

J
Unit: km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle K
D1 → D2 51 – 55 (32 – 34) 42 – 46 (27 – 28)
D2 → D3 80 – 88 (50 – 54) 61 – 69 (38 – 42)
D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 84) 97 – 107 (61 – 66)
L

D4 → D5 184 – 194 (115 – 120) 141 – 151 (88 – 93)


D5 → D6 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 178 – 188 (111 – 116)
M
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 214 – 224 (133 – 139)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 111 – 121 (69 – 75)
D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 111 – 121 (69 – 75) N
D5 → D4 158 – 168 (99 – 104) 70 – 80 (44 – 49)
D4 → D3 111 – 121 (69 – 75) 39 – 49 (25 – 30)
O
D3 → D2 53 – 61 (33 – 37) 12 – 20 (8 – 12)
D2 → D1 7 – 11 (5 – 6) 7 – 11 (5 – 6)

• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. P

Revision: 2010 March TM-273 2009 G37 Convertible


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004375757

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)


Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 48 – 56 (30 – 34) 45 – 53 (28 – 32)
Half throttle 56 – 64 (35 – 39) 52 – 60 (33 – 37)
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004375758

Stall speed 2,475 – 2,775 rpm

Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004375759

Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 25.0 mm (0.98 in)

Revision: 2010 March TM-274 2009 G37 Convertible

You might also like